The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About5781 VAN ALLEN WAY; ; FA080015; PermitCity of Carlsbad Fire Alarm Permit Permit No: FA080015 5781 VAN ALLEN Job Address: WY Permit Type: FALARM Parcel No: 2121304400 Lot #: 0 Reference No.: PC #: Status: ISSUED Applied 2/12/2008 Approved: 2/26/2008 Issued: 2/26/2008 Inspector: Project Title: INVITROGEN TI FIRE ALARM PLAN CHECK & INSPECTION Applicant: ADT SECURITY SERVICES, INC. 3830 CALLE FORTUNADA SAN DIEGO, CA (858) 654-3224 Owner: GRIFFIN CAPITAL CARLSBAD POINTE INVESTORS L L C C/O INVITROGEN CORPORATION 1600 FARADAY AVE CARLSBAD CA Fees ($) Add'I Fees ($) Total ($) Balance ($) 125 0 125 0 rr U FAo&ôiS UL Certificates of Compliance Cut Sheets and CSFM listings for: I NVITROGEN 5781 VAN ALLEN WAY CARLSBAD, CA 92009 Installation Company: Ffre& Security ADT SECURITY SYSTEMS 3830 Calle Fortunada San Diego, CA 92123 (858) 654-3200 00 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. No: 360682-009 W - Eervice Center No 768 Expires: 31-MAR-2008 O1C I/1 c i itQp ly = - - CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the Alarm Service Company indicated below is nctided by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) in its Product Directories as eligible to use the UL Lisli -ig Mark in connection with Certificated Alarm Systems The only evidence of compliance with UL's reqLlrements is the issuance of a UL Certificate for the Alarm System and the Certificate is current under UL ('erllftcdte Verification Service Listed Service From: AURORA, CO Alarm Service Company: (360682-221) Service Center: 1360682-221 • ADT SECURITY SERVICES, INC 401 SECURITY SERVICES INC 14200 E EXPOSITION BLVD 14200 E EXPOSITION BLVD AURORA CO 80012 AURORA CO 80012 The Alarm Service Company Is Listed in the following GertlfIcae Service Categories: File - Vol No, CCN Listing Category 6P34 192 CPVX [Burglar Alarm Systems] Central Stàtan S994 -183 UUFX -- [Signal and Fire Alarm Equipment and Services] (Prctective Signaling Services) Cenlral Station 'THIS CERTIFICATE EXPIRES ON .31 -MAR-2008 "LOOK FOR THE UL ALARM SYSTEM CERTIFICATE11 na t 2 MAR 2306 i IA. r rn C cc S DA-47010 A1-120 Unimode 200 Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel Section: Addressable January 28, 2005 GENERAL The ADT-Unimode 200 is a compact, cost-effective, address- able fire alarm control panel with a capacity of 198 Fire-Lite 300 Series devices. A single Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loop sup- ports up to 99 smoke detectors and 99 control or monitor mod- ules. The panel uses surface-mount technology and is designed for ease of installation and programming. It features the latest in fire protection technology, including maintenance alert and auto- matic detector test. Its enclosure is capable of housing 12.0 AH batteries. The ADT-Unimode 200 includes on the motherboard (rev. PC-D) built-in interfaces for a printer and remote annunciators (on pan- els manufactured after September 1, 2001). FEATURES SLC Loop SLC can be configured for NFPA Style 4, 6, or 7 operation. SLC supports up to 198 addressable devices (99 detectors and 99 monitor or control modules), including addressable dual monitor module. SLC loop maximum length 10,000 ft. (3,048 m) @ 12 AWG (3.1 mm'). Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) Dual integral NACs, Style Y or Z (Class B or A). Silence Inhibit and Auto Silence timer options. Alarm, trouble and supervisory relays, standard. May be programmed for Steady, March Time, Temporal or California code (requires Unimode 200 0. 0 software or greater). 3.0 amp NAC power, expandable to 6.0 amps. Programming and Software Autoprogram and Walk Test features identify two or more devices set to same address. Keypad programmable on panel, with two user-defined pass- words, plus an Autoprogram feature. Custom English labels per point may be manually entered or selected from an internal library file. Remote Acknowledge, Silence, Reset, and Drill via MMF-300 modules and LCD-40 remote annunciators. User Interface Integral 40-character LCD display with backlighting. Real-time clock/calendar. History file with 500-event capacity. Advanced Fire Technology Maintenance alert warns when smoke detector dust accumula- tion is excessive. Battery charger for up to 60 hours of standby power. Waterfiow or supervisory selection per monitor point. System alarm verification selection, smoke only. California State Eke Marshal 7165-0085:172 LISTED CS68/ML266 (Unimode 200) S632 (Unimode 200C) (Unimode 200) MEA FM 16-94-E Vol II (Unimode 200) APPROVED (Unimode 200) 0 Unimode 200 Fuseless, power-limited technology meets UL power-limiting requirements. Detector sensitivity printout. Presignal delay option per NFPA 72. Rapid poll algorithm for manual stations. Responds to alarm/ activation in less than two seconds. Operates with untwisted, unshielded wire (up to 1,000 ft./304.8 m) for retrofit applications (U.S. Patent 5,210,523). 300 Series addressable devices feature decimal address selec- tion. Address of each device can be easily set in the field by use of a screwdriver. UDACT-F Digital Alarm Communicator reports 56 zones or 198 points to a Central Station. Built-in printer interface - UL listed for permanent attachment. ADT-LCD-40 Series alphanumeric, 40-character, backlit re- mote serial annunciators operate over built-in high-speed EIA 485 port. Up to 32 may be supported on the Unimode 200 (requires Unimode 200 v3.0 software or greater). S This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact: One Ton Center Road, Boca Raton, FL 33431 w Security Services Inc. Phone: (561) 988-3600 FAX: (561) 988-3675 Made in the U.S.A. DA-47010 01/28/05 - Page 1 of 4 7=7 ADT-LCD4O Up to 1,000 ft. (914.4 m) between each ADT-LCD40 in the ElA-485 loop, and between each ADT-LCD40 and the FACP 24 VDC ANNUNCIATORS ADT-AFM, LDM-(E)32F, ADT-ACSIACM (I 11WW 8 FORM-C, 5-AMP RELAYS (optional, order ACM-8RF) EIA -485 INTERFACE (DIM-485) built into the motherboard (four wires) EIA -485 in ACS mode .(two wires) SMOKE DETECTORS SD355, SD355T, CP355 DUCT DETECTORS D350PL, D350RPL d - MONITOR MMF-300, MDF-300, MMF-302, CMF-300, CRF-300, 1300 'ft MINI MONITOR MMF-301 ADDRESSABLE MULTI-MODULES MMF-300-10, MMF-302-6, CMF-300-6, CRF-300-6 STEM PERIPHERALS AND WIRING NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) 24VDC BELLS, SIGNALS, STROBES U0 E110E1 NOTE: System can use either ______ EIA -232 the printer OR the ADT-LCD40. INTERFACE They cannot be used (PlM-24) built into simultaneously. the motherboard 00000 DDDDE DUDODI *PRINTER o o ADT-UNICOM I Notes: 1) 'A" suffix should be included when ordering Canadian version 300 Series devices. I C" suffix designates Canadian version ADT-Unimode 200C. ADT-LCD-40 and printer option cannot be used simultaneously. WIRING REQUIREMENTS The SLC requires use of a specific wire type to ensure proper circuit operation. Eit is recommended that all SLC wiring be twisted-pair shielded to minimize the effects of electrical interference. Wire size should be no smaller than 18 AWG (0.78 mm2) and no larger than 12 AWG (3.1 mm2) wire. The wire size depends on the length of the SLC circuit. Use the table below to de- termine the specific wiring requirements for the SLC. Wire Requirements Distance in Feet (m) Typical Wire Size Twisted-pair, shielded 10,000 feet 12 AWG (3.1 mm2): Belden 9583, Genesis 4410, (3,048 m) Signal 98230, WPW D999. Twisted-pair, shielded 8,000 feet 14 AWG (2.00 mm2): Belden 9581, Genesis 4408. (2,438 m) Signal 98430, WPW 0995. Twisted-pair, shielded 4,875 feet 16 AWG (1.3 mm2): Belden 9575, Genesis 4406 (1,486 m) and 4606, Signal 98630, WPW 0991. Twisted-pair, shielded 3,225 feet 18 AWG (0.78 mm2): Belden 9574, Genesis 4402: (983 m) and 4602, Signal 98300, WPW D975. Unwisted, unshielded 1,000 feet (305 m) 12— 18 AWG (3.1 —0.78 mm2). Page 2 of 4 - DA47010 •01/28/05 PULL STATION ADT-BG-1 2LX 51276d1.wn,f COMPATIBLE ADDRESSABLE DEVICES All feature a polling LED and rotary address switches. CR355: Addressable ionization smoke detector. SD355/SD355T: Addressable photoelectric smoke detector (T with thermal sensor). D350PL/D35ORPL: Addressable duct detector (R = with relay). MMF-300: Addressable monitor module for one zone of normally- open dry-contact initiating devices. Mounts in standard 40 (10.16 cm) box. Includes plastic. cover plate and end-of-line resistor. Module may be configured for either a Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class A) initiating device circuit. MDF-300: Dual monitor module. Same as MMF-300 except it op- erates in Style B (Class B) only. Provides two Class B circuits. MMF-301: Miniature version of MMF-300. Excludes LED and Style D option. Connects with wire pigtails. May mount in device backbox. MMF-302: Similar to MMF-300, but may monitor up to 20 con- ventional two-wire detectors. Requires external 24 VDC power. Consult factory for compatible smoke detectors. CMF-300: Addressable control module for one Style Y/Z (Class B/A) zone of supervised polarized Notification Appliances. Mounts directly to a 4" (10.16 cm) electrical box. Notification Appliance Circuit option requires external 24 VDC to power notification ap- pliances. CRF-300: Addressable relay module containing two isolated sets of Form-C contacts, which operate as a DPDT switch. Mounts directly to a 4(10.16cm) box, surface mount using the SM13500. MMF-300-10: Ten-input monitor module. Mount one ortwo modules in a 1313-2F cabinet (optional). Mount up to six modules on a CHS- 6 chassis in a 1313-6F. MMF-302-6: Six-zone interface module. Mount one or two modules in a BB-2F cabinet (optional). Mount up to six modules on a CHS- 6 chassis in a 1313-6F. CMF-300-6: Six-circuit supervised control module. Mount one or two modules in a BB-2F cabinet (optional). Mount up to six modules on a CHS-6 chassis in a 1313-61'. CRF-300-6: Six Form-C relay control module. Mount one or two modules in a 1313-2F cabinet (optional). Mount up to six modules on a CHS-6 chassis in a 1313-6F. 1300: This module isolates the SLC loop from short circuit condi- tions (required for Style 7 operation). ADT-BG-I2LX: Addressable manual pull station with interface module mounted inside. Compatible with legacy Fire-Lite 300 Series devices. Please consult factory for further information on all the previous 300 se- ries devices: CP300/CP350, SD300(T)/SD350(T), DH350P/ DH350RP, C304, M300, M301, M302, C304, and BG-10LX. NOTES: 1) "A" suffix should be included only when ordering ULC listed units (e.g. SD355A, MMF-300A). 2) For more on ADT- Unimode 200 Compatible Addressable Devices, please see the following data sheets (document numbers): 5D355/5D355T (DA-46962), CP355 (DA-46961), D350PUD35ORPL (DA-47013), MMF-300 Series/MDF-300 Monitor Modules (DA-47007), MMF-300-10 (DA-46985), MMF-302-6 (DA-46966), CMF-300-6 (DA-46967), CRF-300-6 (DA-46968), 1300 (DA-47012) and ADT-BG-I2LX (DA-46781). EIA-232 PORT PIM-24: Printer/PC Interface Module, cable, D139F connector and 9-pin male to 25-pin female adapter. DIM-485: ADT-LCD-40 Display Interface Module. NOTE: PIM-24 and DIM-485 options are not available simulta- neously. Neither the PIM-24 or DIM-485 is needed with the ADT- Unimode 200 motherboard Rev. PC-D. COMPATIBLE ANNUNCIATORS! DEVICES USING EIA-485 PORT ADT-LCD-40 Series: 40-character, backlit LCD-type fire annun- ciators capable of displaying English-language text (requires one DIM-485 per ADT-Unimode-200 panel to interface with up to 32 ADT-LCD-40 annunciators). Requires software P/N 73750 or greater - contact ADT Technical Services about software com- patibility questions. ADT-AFM/AFM-X Series: LED-type fire annunciators capable of providing up to 56 software zones of annunciation. Available in increments of 16 or 32 with expandable (AFM-X Series) and non- expandable (ADT-AFM Series) configurations to meet a variety of applications. LDM-F Series: Lamp Driver Module series for use with custom graphic annunciators. ADT-UNICOM: Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. NOTE: For more on ADT-Unimode 200 Compatible Annuncia- tors and Compatible ElA-485 Port Devices, please see the fol- lowing data sheets (document numbers): ADT-UNlCOM (DA- 45193), ADT-LCD40 (DA-45834), ADT-A FM/A FM-X Series(DA- 46499), and LDM-FSeries (DA-47027). FIELD-PROGRAMMING FEATURES Off-Line Programming: Create entire program in your office using a Windows®-based PC computer (order programming kit ADT-PK-U200 separately). Upload/Download system program- ming locally to the ADT-Unimode 200 in less than one minute. Auto-Programming: Command the ADT-Unimode 200 to pro- gram itself (takes less than 30 seconds). In the Auto-Program mode, the ADT-Unimode 200 scans for all possible devices at all addresses, stores the device types, and addresses found, and then loads default values for all options (General Alarm). It also checks for two or more devices set to the same address. On-Line Edit: While still providing fire protection, the ADT- Unimode 200 may be programmed from the front panel. Simple menu trees displayed on the LCD allow the trained user to per- form all functions without referring back to the programming manual. English Label Library: Quickly select labels from a standard library of more than 50 adjectives/nouns, such as "FLR 3 HALL- WAY", or enter custom labels letter-by-letter. Use recall function to repeat previously used label. Program Check: Automatically catch common errors, such as relays not linked to any zone or point. MAINTENANCE ALERT The ADT-Unimode 200 continually monitors each smoke detec- tor and responds to a reading of 80% of the detectors alarm thresh- old. If the detector continually reports an 80% threshold reading (8/10 of what is required to be an alarm condition) for 24 hours, a trouble condition is created. This reduces the risk of false alarms due to dust and dirt by alerting a trouble (maintenance) condition rather than initiating a false alarm. DA-47010'O1/28/05 - Page 3of4 AUTOMATIC TEST OPERATION The ADT-Unimode 200 performs an automatic test of each de- tector every two hours. Failure to meet the test limits causes an AUTO TEST FAIL trouble type. System Reset clears this trouble. NFPA STANDARDS The ADT-Unimode 200 complies with the following NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Systems requirements: LOCAL (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow, and Sprinkler Supervi- sory). AUXILIARY (Automatic, Manual; and Waterflow) (requires RTM- SF). REMOTE STATION (Automatic, Manual, and Waterflow) (re- quires RTM-8F or ADT-UNICOM). PROPRIETARY (Automatic, Manual, and Waterflow). CENTRAL STATION (Automatic, Manual, and Waterflow) (re- quires ADT-UNICOM). CABINET SPECIFICATIONS Door: 17.11" (43.46 cm) high x 14.71" (37.36 cm) wide x 0.375" (0.95 cm) deep. Backbox: 16.90" (42.93 cm) high x 14.50" (36.83 cm) wide x 4.50" (11.43 cm) deep. Trim Ring (part # TR-4-R): 20.02" (50.85 cm) high x 17.62" (44.75 cm) wide. SPECIFICATIONS Primary input power: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 Amps. Total 24 V system power: 3.6 A (expandable to 6.6 A). Standard notification circuits: 2 (Style Y or Z). Expansion notification circuits: up to 99 (using CMF300 module). Notification appliance power: 3.0 A (expandable to 6.OA with XRM-24). Four-wire detector power: 300 mA.* Non-resettable regulated power: 300 mA.* Non-regulated power: 2.5 Amps maximum. *NOTE: Subtract from total 24 VDC source. Battery charger range: 7 AH - 18 AH (BB-17F battery cabinet for 18 AH batteries). Remote charger (panel charger disabled, requires ADT- Unimode 200 circuit board #71741): 25-120 AH (use CHG- 120F). Charge float rate: 27.6 V. Charger current: limited to 0.8 A. Control panel Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory Relay contact ratings: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS LED INDICATORS AC POWER (green). FIRE ALARM (red). SUPERVISORY (yellow). ALARM SILENCE (yellow). SYSTEM TROUBLE (yellow). MEMBRANE SWITCH CONTROLS ACKNOWLEDGE/STEP ALARM SILENCE DRILL SYSTEM RESET (lamp test) 5-16. 12-key pad with full alphabet 17-20. 4 cursor keys 21. ENTER LCD DISPLAY 40 characters (2 x 20) with long-life LCD display, backlit. Page 401 4 - DA-47010 .01/28/05 PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION ADT-Unimode 200: Addressable fire alarm control panel. Includes LCD display, single printed circuit board and cabinet. ADT-Unimode 200C: Same as above with ULC listing and DP-1-B dead-front panel. 9200RBV2.0: Replacement motherboard. RTM-8F: Plug-in relay transmitter option module. Provides eight Form-C relays, plus municipal box and remote station connec- tions. DP-1 -R: Full-length internal dress panel (required for FM appli- cations; included when ordering ADT-Unimode 200C). ADT-IJNlCOM: Digital alarm communicator transmitter. XRM-24: 120 VAC, 100 VA transformer. Expands system power supply. Expands notification appliance power from 3.0 amps to 6.0 amps. PIM-24: Printer interface module required to connect a 40- or 80- column printer.- DIM-485: ADT-LCD-40 display interface module required to con- veil ElA-232 to ElA-485 for use with the LCD-40 Series annun- ciators.** PK-CD: Programming kit for Windows®-based PC computer (re- quires PlM-24 and associated hardware). TR-4-R: Trim ring for semi-flush mounting. BB-17F: Battery box, required to mount BAT-12180 batteries. BB-55F: Battery box, required to house two BAT-12250 batteries and one CHG-120F battery charger. For batteries greater than 25 AH, consult factory for housing/mounting arrangements. CHG-1 20F: Remote battery charging system. Required for charg- ing 25 to 120 AH batteries (can only be used in conjunction with ADT-Unimode 200 circuit board #71741). BAT-1270: Battery, 12 volt, 7.0 AH, (two required). BAT-12120: Battery, 12 volt, 12.0 AH, (two required). BAT-12180: Battery, 12 volt, 18.0 AH, (two required). BAT-12250: Battery, 12 volt, 25 AH, (two required; requires CHG- 120F). BAT-12550: Battery, 12 volt, 55 AH, (two required; requires CHG- 120F). FCPS-24F: Remote power supply expands NAC outputs by 6.0 amps or total system power by 4.0 amps. FCPS-24FS6: Remote power supply expands NAC outputs by 6.0 amps. Integral battery charger capable of 18 AH. FCPS-24F58: Remote power supply expands NAG outputs by 8.0 amps. **NOTE: PlM-24 and DIM-485 options are not available simultaneously. Neither the PlM-24 or DlM485 is needed with the ADT-Unimode 200 motherboard Rev. PC-D. Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. SYSTEMS ALL NORMAL 2;42 A liON6'16'95 EMFMM L'i r Lb GENERAL The ADT-LCD-40 is compact, cost-effective, 40 character, back- lit LCD Fire Annunciators for use with the Unimode 200 Ad- dressable Fire Alarm Control Panel (requires panel firmware Unimode 200 Version 3.0 or greater). The ADT-LCD-40 can display English language text of system point status including: device type, independent point alarm, trouble or supervisory, zone and custom alpha labels programmed into Unimode 200. FEATURES English language, 40 character (20 characters x 2 lines), backlit Liquid Crystal Display. Control switches for System Acknowledge, Signal Silence, Drill and Reset with enable key. System Status LEDs for Power, Alarm, Trouble and Supervi- sory. No programming necessary - LCD mimics the Unimode 200 display (panel firmware upgrade may be required). Displays device type identifiers, individual point alarm, trouble or supervisory, zone and custom alpha labels. Time and date display field. Aesthetically pleasing, semi-flush mount design. Serial EIA-485 interface for reduced installation cost (see reverse side for wiring diagram). May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote power supplies (requires filtered, regulated power). Up to 32 ADT-LCD-40 Series annunciators per Unimode 200. Plug-in terminal blocks for easy installation and service. Can be remotely located up to 3,000 feet (914.4 m) from host control panel. Local piezo sounder with alarm and trouble resound. Semi-flush-mounts to 2-3/16/5.556 cm (minimum) deep, three-gang electrical box (Fire.lite P/N 10103 or equivalent), or surface-mounts to Fire'Lite S1313-3 surface backbox. OPERATION The ADT-LCD-40 provides an array of LEDs to indicate system status (Power, Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory) and control switches for remote control of cirtical system functions, such as: Reset, Silence, Acknowledge and Drill. The ADT-LCD-40 provides the Unimode 200 with up to 32 re- mote serially connected annunciators. Annunciators may be powered from the host Unimode 200 or remote power sup- plies (requires filtered, regulated power). INSTALLATION The ADT-LCD-40 can be semi-flush mounted to a 2-3/16: (mini- mum) deep, three-gang electrical box (Fire.Lite P/N 10103 or equivalent) or an S1313-3 surface backbox. A control-switch key- lock is included to prevent unauthorized use of control switches. See page 2 for information on mounting the ADT-LCD-40. DA-45834 • B-hO ADT-LCD-40 Liquid Crystal Display Fire Annunciator for use with Unimode 200 Section: Annunciators February 25, 2005 California State Fire c;:j!i;: zzzZS 1Marshal 165-0085:172 LISTED APPROVED S232 MEA 16-94-E Vol. IV 51474O .-f ADT-LCD-40 PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION ADT-LCD-40 40-character, backlit, English language, LCD Fire Annunciator. DIM-485 Display Interface Module (needed to convert EIA- 232 output to Unimode 200 to ElA-485 [terminal mode] for use with LCD-40 Series). ADT-ROM-U20044 PROM kit upgrade includes Unimode 200 V. 3.0 or greater (needed to update FACP with software releases prior to Unimode 200 V. 3.0). For use with ADT-LCD-40 PROMkit ADT-ROM- LCD40V2. Call ADT to ensure software compatibility between FACP and annunciator PROM kits. 10103 Three-gang electrical box, 2-3/16/5.556 cm deep (minimum) for semi-flush-mount applications. SBB-3 Three-gang surface backbox, for surface-mount applications. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact: One Town Center Road, Boca Raton, FL 33431 I Security Services Inc. Phone: (561) 988-3600 FAX: (561) 988-3675 Made in the ti.S.A. DA-45834 • 02/25/05 - Page 1 of 2 TERMINAL MODE WIRING All field wiring terminations on the ADT-LCD-40 use removable I for the EIA-485 communications in (twisted-pair), two for the blocks for ease of wiring and circuit testing. ElA-485 communications return (twisted-pair from last ADT- Communications between the FACP and the annunciators are LCD-40 on loop) and two for 24 VDC regulated power. Dip accomplished overan ElA-485 serial interface, greatly reduc- I switches control local functions, such as: piezo disable, con- ing wire and installation systems. Six wires are required: two trol switches/ key-switch disable, trans mitlrecieve mode. LCD-40 TERMINAL MODE WIRING 3,000 feet back from and of EIA-485 loop Terminal Mode EIA-485 (2-wires) IM 24vDc DUOO 0 (2-wires) Terminal Mode ElA-.85 return (2-wires) 3,000 feet back from end of EIA-485 loop Unimode 200 Notes: ElA-485: Maximum of 3,000 ft. (1,828.8m) cable length from FACP to first ADT-LCD-40; 6,000 ft. cable length between each LCD-40; and 3,000 feet from the last ADT-LCD-40 back to the FACP. Circuit is power-limited. Up to 32 ADT-LCD-40 Series annunciators may be used on the ElA-485 circuit. The Unimode 200 can power a maxi- mum of five ADT-LCD-40s; If additional ADT-LCD-40s are connected, the Fire-Lite FCPS-24F may be used to supply additional power. (Power supplies used for this purpose must have their negative terminals commoned together). MOUNTING TO BACKBOX(ES) CAUTION! The ADT-LCD-40 can ONLY be semi-flush- mounted to a three-gang electrical box with a depth of 2-3/ 16 minimum (Fire-Lite P/N 10103 or equivalent). The ADT-LCD-40 CANNOT be mounted in three gangable electrical switch boxes connected together. The ADT-LCD-40 also can be mounted to the S1313-3 surface backbox for surface-mount applications. Eetween each ADT-LCD-40 are four wires: a twisted- shielded pair for data communications and a pair for 24 \DC power. The return circuit only requires two wires for data communication supervision, wired from the last ADT- LCD-40 on the loop. Each may have ACK/STEP, SIGNAL SILENCE, DRILL and SYSTEM RESET switches. Lisplays all 198 addressable points of Unimode 200. No programming required for ADT-LCD-40s. Mounting ADT-LCD-40 flange Holes Electrical Installer's Note: This annunciator may not fit easily into a standard 3-gang electrical box if locking clamps are - used to secure wiring entering the rear or side knockouts. Only use the TOP or BOTTOM knockouts to bring wiring into a stan- dard 3-gang electrical box. 5-13/16" (147.6375 mm) wide x 4" (101.6 mm) high x minimum 2-3/16" (55.5625 mm) deep, three-gang electrical box (F!re.Lite P/N 10103 or equivalent). 10103 shown at right. Page 2 of 2 - DA-45834-62j25/05 CPOWEP tAIARM -ywuets asupv'viso, = = • .......... ADT Security Services, Inc. One Town Center Road Boca Raton, FL 33431 Phone: (561) 988-3600 FAX: (561) 988-3675 Unimode2OO Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel Programming, Installation, Maintenance and Operating Instruction Manual Document #50101 6/17/99 Rev. Gj © 1999 ADT Installation Precautions - Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reli Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may oper- ate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Services Depart- ment if any problems are anticipated or encountered. CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter 7 after any programming inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance test- Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, ing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system reaming or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to sys- all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifi- tern hardware or wiring. cations, verify that they will not interfere with battery, trans- All components, circuits, system operations or software functions - known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addi- tion, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices must also be tested and proper system operation verified. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-490 Cl 32-1200 F and at relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 300 C/86° F. However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27° Cl 60-80° F. Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device voltage. WARNING - Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or inter- connecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. former and printed circuit board location. Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tight- ening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal con- tact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. This system contains static-sensitive components Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating and pro- gramming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. Fire Alarm System Limitations An automatic fire alarm system - typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audi- ble warning devices and a fire alarm control with remote noti- fication capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A sec- ond floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detectors - both ionization and photoelectric types, have sensing limita- tions. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, com- munications, signaling and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, crippling its ability to report a fire. FCC Warning While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time. Rate-of-Rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensi- tivity overtime. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Equipment used in the system may not be technically compat- ible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system wiring should be tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplies with each device. System inspection and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept. WARNING: This equipment generates, uses and can radi- ate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interfer- ence to radio communications, It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of 15 of FCC Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radia- tion noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communi- cations. Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radioelec- triques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites clans le Reglement sur le brouillage radio- electrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada. Table of Contents CHAPTER 1: Product Description ..............................................................................................................8 1.1: Features .......................................................................................................................................................8 1.2: Specifications ..............................................................................................................................................9 1.3: Controls and Indicators ...............................................................................................................................10 FIGURE 1-1: Unimode 200 Membrane/Display Panel.......................................................................11 1.4: Circuits ........................................................................................................................................................11 1.5: Components.................................................................................................................................................12 1.5.1: Addressable Devices: 300 Series Detectors......................................................................................13 1.5.2: Addressable Devices: 300 Series Modules .......................................................................................13 1.5.3: Addressable Device Accessories.......................................................................................................14 1.6: Optional Modules........................................................................................................................................15 1.7: Accessories..................................................................................................................................................16 l.7.1: Dress Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 16 1.7.2: Battery Box .......................................................................................................................................16 1.7.3: ADT-CHG-120 Battery Charger.......................................................................................................17 FIGURE 1-2: ADT-CHG-120 Battery Charger....................................................................................17 1.7.4: Annunciators .....................................................................................................................................18 1.7.5: FCPS-24F Remote Field Charger Power Supply for System Power Expansion ..............................20 CHAPTER2: Installation............................................................................................................................21 FIGURE 2-1: Unimode 200 Cabinet Dimensions - older version ....................................................... 21 2.1: Backbox Mounting......................................................................................................................................22 FIGURE 2-2: Unimode 200 Cabinet Mounting - older version ..........................................................22 FIGURE 2-3: Unimode 200 Cabinet Dimensions - new version.........................................................23 FIGURE 2-4: Unimode 200 Cabinet Mounting - new version............................................................24 2.2: Power...........................................................................................................................................................25 2.2.1: AC Power and Earth Ground Connections........................................................................................25 2.2.2: Battery Power....................................................................................................................................25 2.2.3: DC Power Output Connections.........................................................................................................25 FIGURE 2-5: DC Power Outputs ........................................................................................................25 2.3: Standard Relays...........................................................................................................................................26 FIGURE 2-6: Relay Connections ........................................................................................................26 2.4: Notification Appliance Circuits...................................................................................................................26 FIGURE2-7: NAC Connections.........................................................................................................26 2.5: UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements ....................................................................................................27 FIGURE 2-8: Typical UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements.........................................................27 2.6: Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit...............................................................................................................28 TABLE 2-1: Communications Loop Performance..............................................................................28 FIGURE 2-9: Style 4 T-tapping and Branch Resistance .....................................................................29 FIGURE 2-10: Style 6 Wiring Requirements......................................................................................29 FIGURE 2-11: Two-Wire Communications Loop ..............................................................................30 FIGURE 2-12: Four-Wire Communications Loop..............................................................................31 FIGURE 2-13: 4-Wire Communications Loop....................................................................................32 FIGURE 2-14: Shield Termination in No Conduit..............................................................................33 FIGURE 2-15: Shield Termination in Full Conduit ............................................................................33 FIGURE 2-16: Shield Termination in Partial Conduit........................................................................33 2.7: The Isolator Module....................................................................................................................................34 FIGURE 2-17: Isolating Two-Wire Communications Loops..............................................................34 2.8: Module Addressing .....................................................................................................................................34 FIGURE 2-18: Module Addressing Switches......................................................................................34 2.9: The M300 Monitor Module.........................................................................................................................35 2.10: The M301 Monitor Module ........................................................................................................................ 35 2.11: The M302 Monitor Module.......................................................................................................................36 Document50101 Rev.G 6/17199 PIN., 50101:G Table of Contents FIGURE 2-19: Style B Circuit using M300.........................................................................................37 FIGURE 2-20: Style D Circuit using M300 ........................................................................................38 FIGURE 2-21: Style B Circuit using M302.........................................................................................39 FIGURE 2-22: Style D Circuit using M302 .........................................................................................40 2.12: The Control Module ...................................................................................................................................41 FIGURE 2-23: C304 Control Module - Alarm Polarity .......................................................................41 FIGURE 2-24: C304 Control Module - Utilized as Form-C Relay.....................................................42 FIGURE 2-25: Style Y NAC using C304.............................................................................................43 2.13: The Addressable Manual Pull Station ........................................................................................................ 44 FIGURE 2-26: Addressable Manual Pull Station Wiring....................................................................44 2.14: Wiring Detectors ..................................................................... .......... ........................................................ 45 FIGURE 2-27: Wiring Detector with Removable Plug-in Connector ................................................. 45 2.15: Optional Modules ................................................................... ............ ..................................................... 46 FIGURE 2-28: Option Module Locations .......................... ................................................................... 46 2.15.1: UNI-COM Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter...................................................46 FIGURE2-29: ADT-UBSIF ...............................................................................................................46 FIGURE 2-30: ADT-ABS8RF ....................................................... ...................................................... 47 FIGURE 2-3 1: UNI-COM Mounting to Unimode 200 (new verrions effective 4/14/99)...................47 FIGURE 2-32: External UNI-COM Mounting in ADT-ABS8RF preferred mounting method).......48 2.15.2: ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Module.............................................................................................49 FIGURE 2-33: ADT-ABS8RF Enclosure.............................................................................................49 FIGURE 2-34: ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Module InstallatiDn .................................................... 49 2.15.3: RTM-8F Option Module Installation ..............................................................................................50 FIGURE 2-35: RTM-8F Module Installation......................................................................................50 FIGURE 2-36: RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module ............................................................................51 2.16: Printer/PC Interface Module......................................................................................................................52 FIGURE 2-37: Remote Serial Printer and Computer Connections .....................................................52 TABLE 2-2: Typical Printer Settings .................................................................................................52 CHAPTER 3: Programming/Read Status.....................................................................................................53 3.1: Initial Power-up .................................................................................... ...................................................... 54 3.2: Programming ............................................................................ ............. ...................................................... 55 3.3: Program Change - Level One ............................................................... ...................................................... 56 3.3.1: Clear........................................................................................56 3.3.2: Autoprogram ......................................................................................................................................56 3.3.3: Point Edit ........................................................................................................................................... 60 3.3.4: System Edit ........................................................................................................................................61 3.3.5: Password Change ..............................................................................................................................62 3.3.6: Load...................................................................................................................................................63 3.4: Program Change - Level 2...........................................................................................................................63 3.4.1: Disable ..................................................................................... ......................................................... 64 3.4.2: Clear History .....................................................................................................................................65 3.4.3: Walktest ........................................................................ .......... .......................................................... 65 3.4.4: Set Time and Date ......................................................... .................................................................... 66 3.4.5: Check ......................................................................................... ........................................................ 66 CHAPTER 4: Operating Instructions .....................................................67 4.1: Control Switches (Keys)..............................................................................................................................67 4.1.1: Acknowledge/Step.............................................................................................................................67 4.1.2: Alarm Silence....................................................................................................................................67 4.1.3: Drill Hold 2 See ................................................................................................................................. 67 4.1.4: System Reset ...................................................................................................................................... 67 4.2: LED Indicators ............................................................................................................................................68 4.3: Normal Operation ............................................................................. .......................................................... 68 4.4: Trouble Operation ............................................................................. ........................................................... 69 4 Document #50101 Rev G 6117199P/N50101:G Table of Contents TABLE 4-1: Specific Device Troubles for a Detector ........................................................................69 TABLE 4-2: Specific Device Troubles for a Module..........................................................................70 4.5: Alarm Operation..........................................................................................................................................71 4.6: Supervisory Operation.................................................................................................................................71 4.7: NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit) Operation .......................................................................................72 4.8: Control-By-Event Operation.......................................................................................................................72 4.9: Detector Functions ......................................................................................................................................72 4.10: Time Functions: Real-Time Clock............................................................................................................72 4.11: Coded Operation - NAC 1 & NAC 2.........................................................................................................73 4.12: Presignal....................................................................................................................................................73 4.13: Special System Timers ..............................................................................................................................73 4.13.1: Silence Inhibit Timer (None or 60 Seconds)...................................................................................73 4.13.2: Auto-silence Timer (None or 10 Minutes)......................................................................................73 4.13.3: Trouble Reminder ...........................................................................................................................73 4.13.4: Alarm Verification (None or Two Minutes)....................................................................................73 4.13.5: Waterfiow Circuits Operation .........................................................................................................74 4.13.6: Disable/Enable Operation ...............................................................................................................74 4.14: Style 6 Wiring............................................................................................................................................74 4.15: Read Status................................................................................................................................................74 AppendixA: Power Supply Calculations .................................................................................................77 A. 1: The AC Branch Circuit ..............................................................................................................................77 TABLE A-I: AC Branch Circuit Requirements @ 120VAC .............................................................77 A.2: The Main Power Supply ............................................................................................................................78 TABLE A-2: Filtered Load in Standby - External Devices Connected to T134 Only ........................78 TABLE A-3: Filtered Load in Alarm - External Devices Connected to T132 & T134 Only ...............79 TABLE A-4: Battery Calculations .......................................................................................................80 Appendix B: Software Zones ...................................................................................................................81 FIGURE B-I: Software Zoning Example ...........................................................................................82 TABLE B- 1: Detector Programming Sheet Example .........................................................................83 TABLE B-2: Module Programming Sheet Example ..........................................................................84 FIGURE B-2: Blank Zoning Sheet .....................................................................................................85 TABLE B-3: Blank Detector Programming Sheet .............................................................................86 TABLE B-4: Blank Module Programming Sheet ...............................................................................87 Appendix C: ADT-LCD40 Series Wiring ................................................................................................88 FIGURE C-l: ADT-LCD40 Series Wiring ........................................................................................88 Appendix D: AFM and LDM Series Wiring ............................................................................................89 AppendixE: NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements ...............................................................................93 FIGURE E-1: Central Station Service Using MS-5012 ......................................................................94 TABLE E-1: MS-5012 Connections to Unimode 200 ........................................................................94 FIGURE E-2: Municipal Box Connected to RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module ...................95 FIGURE E-3: Remote Station Connection Using RTM-8F Module ..................................................96 FIGURE E-4: Proprietary Protective Signaling System .....................................................................97 AppendixF: Wire Requirements .............................................................................................................98 TABLE F-i: Unimode 200 Wire Specifications .................................................................................98 AppendixG: Screen Options flowchart ...................................................................................................99 Document50101 Rev.G 6117/99 PIN: 50101:G This control panel has been designed to comply with standards set forth by the following regulatory agencies: Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 864 NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code CAN/ULC - S527-M87 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems NFPA Standards (] This Fire Alarm Control Panel complies with the following NFPA Fire Alarm Codes: NFPA® NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code for Central Station Fire Alarm Systems Protected Premises Unit (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) - requires UNI-COM, Local Fire Alarm Systems (Automatic, Manual Waterflow and Sprinkler Supervisory), Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) - requires RTM-8F, Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) - requires RTM-8F or UNI-COM, Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) Protected Premises Unit, Automatic Fire Detectors, Installaltion, Maintenance & Use of Notification Appliances for Fire Alarm Systems and Testing Procedures for Fire Alarm Systems. Underwriters Laboratories Documents: L UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station UL 228 Door Closers—Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances UL 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired U LC CAN/IJLC - S524-M91 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems Other. EIA-485 and EIA-232 Serial Interface Standards NEC Article 250 Grounding NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems Applicable Local and State Building Codes Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (LAHJ) ADT Documents Relating to Unimode 200 ADT Device Compatibility Document Document #Al 5378 Annunciator Modules Document #15390 ADT-AFM- 16AT and AFM-32A Annunciators Document #A 15048 ADT-AFM- 16A Annunciator Document #A 15207 MS-SO 12 Communicator Document #15465 PK-9200W Off Line Programming Utility Document #50684 UNI-COM Communicator/Transmitter Document #50075 FCPS-24F Field Charger/Power Supply Document #50079 ADT-CHG-120 Battery Charger Document #50938 LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules Document #A15585 ADT-LCD40 Remote Fire Annunciaotr Document #50520 ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Manual Document #A 15342 Document #50101 Rev. Cl 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Unimode 200 Main Circuit Board Power-limited Non-resettable Power-limited 24 VDC Nonregulated Power-limited Special Purpose Resettable 1 24 VDC 24 VDC \ T I 4000000 Power-limited NAC (BELL) 2 J17 B+A+A-B- \ Eli 2 2 Al Connector 100001 Supervisory Trouble I Alarm J Power-limited SLC Loop Shield 2 or 4-Wire NOCNONCCNONCC A øøøøøøø 6~000(z I Power-limite Jil EIA-485 Power-limited Annunciator NAC (BELL) I DIM-485 for ADT-LCD4O T B+A+A-B- PIM-24 Printer/PC or LI1 12/ B I 1 2 3 4 I 1 ®®®®I Interface Connector B,A,A-B- I B,A,A-8 --NONC C 1 2 tleeøøeøl hi — — — - - J16 I J16 UNl-COM Connector ri 9STBa CAUTION: ' i d HIGH J17 VOLTAGE mom= jig WRITE Cal _______ ______F41 PROTECT JP4 _____________ SW' J19/ N Ground IHiflhlill sr X Cj Optional Transforme PHot J6 Connector JP4 JPI J15 -jp3( Fault LED S\ 4 J15 Connector _______ JP1 Membrane Switches/ Write for RTM-8F Cut for RTMF Cut to Disable Display Connector Option Module Supervision Protect No AC Battery Charger Trouble __ (JP1 is only on JP3 swi __ newer versions of Cut to Disable Up position isoo I the main circuit Fround Fault Write Protect. sw TB8 ' board #71741, Detection AC Power - + effective 4/14/99) (Shownin Non- Normal Position is Up. If Using Terminal Battery Write Protect Communicator for Central Station Connector Programming (see Figure E-1), Must be Down, Position) As Shown, to enable AC Loss Delay Reporting. Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 7 Product Description CHAPTER 1 Product Description The ADT Unimode 200 is a compact, cost effective, addressable FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel) with an extensive list of powerful features. The combination of 300 Series Addressable Devices and the Unimode 200 FACP offers the latest in fire protection technology. The power supply and all electronics are contained on a single circuit board housed in an attractive metal cabinet, providing a complete fire control system for most applications. Optional mod- ules, which plug into the main circuit board, are available ±or special functions. Available accessories include LED, graphic and LCD annunciators, digital communicator, local downloading software and remote power expansion. 1.1 Features Single standard SLC loop which meets NFPA Style 4, 6 and 7 requirements 198 addressable device capacity (99 detectors and 99 monitor/control modules) 56 software zones Two main circuit board NACs (Notification [bell] Appliance Circuits) expandable via control modules Optional RTM-817 eight zone relay module with local energy/reverse polarity transmitter Optional ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Module Optional Printer/PC Interface Module 3.6 amps system power expandable to 6.6 amps 3.0 amps NAC power expandable to 6.0 amps 40 character LCD display (backlit) Real-time clock/calendar History file with 500 event capacity Advanced fire technology features: / Automatic device type-code verification / Auto detector test / Maintenance alert / Point trouble identification Waterfiow (nonsilenceable) selection per module point Supervisory (latching or autoresettable) selection pr point with separate system LED Note that the autoresettable feature is only availabkforpanels with software version #UNIMODE200V4. 0 or higher System alarm verification selection Walktest with report of two devices set to same address Presignal per NFPA 72 Annunciators / AFM LED Zone Annunciator Series / LDM Graphic Annunciator Series / ADT-LCD40 Series Liquid Crystal Point Display Annunciator Silence inhibit timer option Autosilence timer option Continuous/March Time/Temporal or California code for main circuit board NACs Remote ACKlSilence/ResetlDrill via M300, M301 modules, AFM annunciators or ADT-LCD40 Remote Fire Annunciator Auto-program (learn mode) reduces installation tine Password and key-protected nonvolatile memory 8 Document #,10101 Rev. C 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 Specifications is User programmable password Fully programmable form panel keyboard Programmable from an off-line PC Rapid poll algorithm for manual stations (U.S. Patent Pending) SLC operates up to 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) or 1,000 ft. (300 m) with untwisted, unshielded wire (U.S. Patent #5,210,523) Uses 300 Series Addressable Devices: / CP300 - Ionization Smoke Detector / SD300 - Photoelectric Smoke Detector / SD300T - Photoelectric Smoke Detector with 1350 Thermal Detection / C304 - Control Module / M300 - Monitor Module / M301 - Miniature Monitor Module / M302 - 2-wire Detector Module Module / 1300 - Isolator Module All 300 Series devices (except 1300) feature decade code wheels for addressing 300 Series addressable smoke detectors feature a plug-in wiring connector for ease-of-installation and maintenance IJNI-COM Digital Communicator, reports up to 56 zones or 198 points (all 300 Series devices) to a UL listed Central Station 0 1.2 Specifications AC Power- TB8 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 amps Wire size: minimum #14 AWG (2.00 mm2) with 600V insulation Battery (Lead Acid Only) - J3 Maximum Charging Circuit: Normal Flat Charge - 27.6V @ 0.8 amp Maximum Battery Capacity: 18 Amp Hour (new Unimode 200 cabinet holds maximum 12 Amp Hour batteries. Batteries greater than 12 AH up to 18 Amp Hour require BB- 17F or other UL listed battery cabinet). For 25 to 120 Amp Hour batteries, use the ADT-CHG- 120 Battery Charger only if the newer Unimode 200 main circuit board #71741, with jumper JP 1, is installed. Note: Jumper fF1, on the FA CF main circuit board, must be cut to disable FA CF battery charger when using the A DT-CHG-120. Communication Loop - TB6 15 VDC nominal, 27.6 VDC maximum Maximum length is 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) total twisted pair length Maximum loop current is 250 mA (short circuit) or 100 mA (normal) Maximum loop resistance is 40 ohms Supervised and power-limited Note that the communication loop may leave the protectedpremises, provided an appropriate surge suppressor is used (refer to the A DT Device Compatibility Document for a list of UL listed compatible surge suppressors) Notification Appliance Circuits - TB1 & T132 Nonregulated special purpose power Power-limited circuitry Maximum voltage drop in wiring: 2.0 V Nominal operating voltage: 24 VDC Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G 9 Controls and Indicators Current for all external devices: 3.0 amps expandable to 6.0 amps' Current-limit: Fuseless, electronic, power-limited circuitry Maximum signaling current per circuit: 2.50 amps End-of-line resistor: 4.7K ohms, V2 watt (P/N 71252 UL listed) for NACs Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory Relays - TB3 Contact rating: 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive), 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive) Alarm and Trouble relays: Form-C Supervisory relay: Form-A Refer to Figure 2-6, "Relay Connections," on page 26 for information on power-limited wiring for relay circuits Four-Wire Smoke Detector Power (24 VDC nominal) - TB4, Terminals 5(+) and 6(-) Maximum ripple voltage: 10 mV 5 Maximum standby current: 50 mA Up to 300 mA is available for powering 4-wire smoke detectors 2 3 Power-limited circuit Nonresettable Filtered 24 VDC Power (24 VDC nominal) - TB4, Terminals 3(+) & (4-) Maximum ripple voltage: 1 OmVRms Maximum standby current: 150 mA Total DC current available from this output is up to 300 mA1 2 3 Power-limited circuit Nonregulated Special Purpose 24 VDC Power- TB4, Terminals 1(+) & 2(-) Operating voltage range: 18V to 30V Total DC current available for powering external devices is 2.5 amps2 This power is not recommended for AFM, LDM or ADT-LCD40 annunciators Power-limited circuit 1.3 Controls and Indicators LCD Display The Unimode 200 uses a 40-character (2 lines X 20 SYSTEMS ALL NORMAL characters) high viewing angle LCD display with a character height of 3/16". The display includes a long-life LED backlight that remains illuminated. If AC power is lost and the system is not in alarm, the LED backlight will turn off to conserve batteries. LED Indicators LED indicators are provided to annunciate the following conditions: AC Power (green) Fire Alarm (red) Supervisory (yellow) Alarm Silence (yellow) System Trouble (yellow) Ground Fault (yellow) - located on bottom of main circuit board (refer to figure on page 6) Total current for special purpose power, nonresettable power, 4-wire smoke power and two NACs must not exceed 6.0 amps. is Total external system current in excess of 3.6 amps requires XRM-24 Transformer and 12 AH or 17 AH batteries, not 7.0 AH. For power supply calculations, refer to Appendix A. Total current for resettable 4-wire smoke detector power and nonresettable power must not exceed 600 mA. 10 Document#50101 Rev G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Circuits . Membrane Panel Mounted on the main circuit board, the membrane switch panel includes a window for the LCD display and five sys- tem status LEDs. The membrane panel, which is visible with the cabinet door closed, has 21 keys, including a 12 key alpha-numeric pad similar to a telephone keypad. Function switches: FIGURE 1-1:1.1nimode 200 Membrane/Display Acknowledge/Step Alarm Silence Drill System Reset (lamp test) Service/program switches: keys labeled 1 to 9 * (detector) key # (module) key 0 (recall) key four cursor keys (up, down, right and left) Enter key Local 1'iezo Sounder A piezo sounder provides separate and distinct pulse rates for alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions. 1.4 Circuits SLC Communication Loop One SLC loop, configurable for NFPA Style 4, 6 or 7, is provided for communication to addressable monitor (initiat- ing device) and control (output device) modules. Output Circuits The following output circuits are available on the FACP: 24 Volt Resettable Power Output 300 mA 24 Volt Nonresettable Power Output 300 mA 24 Volt Battery Charger (up to 18 AH batteries) NAC (Notification Appliance Circuits) Two NACs, configurable for Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A), are provided with various programmable features. Relays Three dry contact relays are provided for System Alarm and System Trouble (Form-C contacts) and Supervisory (Form-A contacts). Contacts are rated 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive) and 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive). Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 11 Components 1.5 Components .... ___ tIø . Main Circuit Board Li The main circuit board contains the system's CPU, power supply, other primary components I ' 1 and wiring interface connectors. Optional modules plug-in and are mounted to the main . circuit board. The circuit board is delivered ALL HOL J SVSTEMS 12 A NM 03.'02.'98 premounted in the Unimode 200 cabinet. Note that newer versions of the circuit board have jumper JPJ which can be cut to disable the . FA CP battery chaiger when using an external r battery chaiger such as the ADT-CHG-120. - .JPi EN 7 ••,•• Cabinet The Unimode 200 cabinet is red with an attractive navy blue front over- lay. The backbox provides space for two batteries (up to 7 Amp Hour in old version, up to 12 Amp Hour in new version). Refer to Figure 2- 1, "Unimode 200 Cabinet Dimensions - older version," on page 21 through Figure 2-4, "Unimode 200 Cabinet Mounting - new version," on page 24, for information on dimensions. Ample knockouts are pro- vided for system wiring. Also available is an optional dress panel (ADT-DP200 [red] for older backbox or DP- 1-B [blue] for newer back- box) ,which mounts to the inside of the cabinet (included on the ULC version [Unimode 200C]). The dress panel must be installed to meet FM requirements (refer to "Dress Panel" on page 16). UI Standard Optional XRM-24 Transformer Assembly One 100VA transformer is provided standard with the panel (3.6 amps maximum). An optional 100 VA transformer (XRM-24) is available to provide maximum accessory power (6.6 amp total). Note that transformers are mounted horizontally (as shown) in the newer version of the cabinet which will replace the existing cabinet effective April 14, 1999. Transformers mount vertically in the older cabinet. C Batteries The Unimode 200 cabinet provides space for two bat- teries (up to 7 Amp Hour in old version, up to 12 Amp Hour in new version). 18 AH batteries require use of the BB- 17F or similar UL listed battery cabinet. The newer version Unimode 200 main circuit board, which incorporates jumper JP 1 for disabling the FACP charger, can use the ADT-CHG- 120 for charging 25 to 120 AH batteries. Batteries must be ordered separately and require use of the BB-55F UL listed battery cabinet. NBattery Cable P/N 75287 Batte Cable PIN !75287 12 Document#50101 Rev 0 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Components 0 1.5.1 Addressable Devices: 300 Series Detectors The 300 Series Addressable Detectors consist of the SD300 Photoelectric smoke detector, SD300T Photoelectric smoke detector with thermal sensor and the CP300 Ionization smoke detector. The detectors communicate with the main circuit board CPU via an SLC loop. The Unimode 200 CPU determines the alarm, maintenance or normal sta- tus of each device. Each detector responds to an address that is manually set via built-in rotary decimal switches. Each detector head has a removable plug-in connector for. ease of wiring and maintenance (or service), as well as a single LED and test connections. Detector specifications are as follows: Voltage Range: 15-28 Volts DC peak Diameter: 5.0 inches (12.7 cm) Standby Current: 150 uA @24 VDC Height: 3.0 inches (7.6 cm) LED Current:7 mA @ 24 VDC (latched 'ON') Temperature: 00 to 49° C (320 to 120° F) Loop Resistance:40 ohms maximum Rel. Humidity: 10% to 85% Non-condensing Air Velocity:CP300 = 1,500 ft./minute (7.6 m/S) max., SD300 = 3,000 ft./minute (15 mIS) max. SD300, SD300T The SD300 is an addressable photoelectric smoke detector which provides smoke sensing uti- I I lizing optical sense technology. The detector sends a unique 'type' code to aid the automatic OEM programming feature in the control panel. The SD300T includes a 135°F fixed thermal sensor. CP300 The CP300 is an addressable ionization smoke detector which measures the level of com- bustion products in its chamber using the 'ionization principle.' The detector sends a unique 'type' code to aid the automatic programming feature in the control panel. I I RA400Z The RA400Z is a remote single LED annunciator that can be wired directly to an address- able detector for annunciation of that detector's alarm status. 1.5.2 Addressable Devices: 300 Series Modules The C304 Control Module plus the M300, M301 and M302 Monitor Modules provide an interface between the Uni- mode 200 and conventional initiating devices and notification appliances. All modules respond to an address that is set by the installer via two built-in rotary decimal switches. A flashing LED indicates power is applied to the mod- ules (except for M301). A thermoplastic cover is provided with all modules, except the M301, for mounting to a 4" square mounting box. M300 The M300 is an addressable monitor module that can be used to monitor conventional nor- mally open contact alarm initiating devices, such as manual pull stations, 4-wire smoke detec- tors, heat detectors, waterfiow and supervisory devices. The supervised circuit can be wired NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class A). The M300 module will not support 2-wire smoke detectors. The M300 modules can be tested with a test magnet available from ADT (M02-04-00). The magnet test checks the module electronics and connections to the control panel. The module mounts to a 4" square electrical box with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". M301 The M301 is an addressable monitor module that is a miniature version of the M300. It con- nects with wire pigtails (Style B [Class B] only), and may be mounted directly in the electri- cal box of the device being monitored. Dimensions of 2.75" (6.985 cm) Lx 1.30" (3.302 cm) W x 0.50' (1.27 cm) D, allow for mounting in existing single-gang electrical boxes, the device being monitored or similar locations. H!O Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17199 P/N50101:G 13 14 Components M302 The M302 is an addressable monitor module that can be used to interface and monitor conventional 2-wire smoke detectors. All 2-wire detectors being monitored must be 0 o UL compatible with the module (refer to the ADT Device Compatibility Document). The supervised circuit can be wired NFPA Style B or D. The M302 module can be tested with a test magnet available from ADT (P/N M02-04-00). Separate filtered ' switched 24 VDC power is required. The module mounts to a 4" square electrical box (J with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". C304 The C304 is an addressable control module that can be used as a Notification Appli- 0 ance or Speaker Circuit for powering and supervising compatible, UL listed notifica- tion appliances. The module's supervised circuit can be wired NFPA Style Y or Z. A 47K ohm ELR is provided. By breaking two built-in tabs, the C304 can be employed as a Form-C control relay. The module mounts to a 4" square electrical box with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". ADT-BG-10LX The ADT-BG- IOLX is an addressable manual pull station featuring a key-lock reset. The pull station responds to an address set by the installer using the built-in rotary dec- imal switches on the pull station. The manual pull station includes a key. 1300 The loop isolator module is an automatic switch which opens the circuit voltage to the 0 o SLC Loop branch(es) whenever a wire-to-wire short circuit is detected on that loop. The remainder of the communications loop leading up to the 1300 will continue to operate, unaffected by the short. The isolator module has four terminal connections, allowing input and output SLC connections. The isolator module is bi-directional, 0 0 meaning that it can detect a fault condition between the input SLC terminals or output SLC terminals. The 1300 is required to meet NFPA Style 7 requirements. 1.5.3 Addressable Device Accessories E.O.L. Resistor Assembly P/N R-47K The 47K End-of-Line Resistor Assembly is used to supervise the M300 Monitor and C304 Control Module circuits. The resistor is included with each M300 and C304 module. E.O.L. Power Supervision Relay The UL listed End-of-Line Power Supervision Relay is used to supervise the power to 4- wire smoke detectors and notification appliances. ~~Rm N-ELR Mounting Plate The N-ELR is a single End-of-Line resistor plate which is required for use in Canada. 0 An ELR, which is supplied with each module and fire alarm control panel, is mounted to the ELR plate. Resistors mounted to the N-ELR plate can be used for the supervision of an M300 and M301 Monitor Module and C304 Control Module circuit. Document#5010I Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 11 Optional Modules 1.6 Optional Modules The Unimode 200 main circuit board includes option module connectors which are located on the right side of the board. Available option modules include the following: ADT-ACM-811 Relay Control Module The ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Module contains eight high current (5 amps) Form-C relays. The module inter- faces to host fire alarm control panels which employ an EIA-485 communications bus. ADT-ACM-8R modules may be connected to the EIA-485 bus up to 6,000 feet (1,800 m) away from the host control panel. Power-limited, filtered, nonresettable power must be supplied by the host FACP or a UL listed power supply such as the FCPS-24F. Refer to Figure 2-34, "ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Module Installation," on page 49, for wiring details. RTM-8F Relay Module The RTM-8F Relay/Transmitter Module plugs into connector J6 and mounts on the bottom right side of the Unimode 200 main circuit board. When the module is installed, jumper JP4 must be cut in order to provide module placement supervision. The RTM-817 provides eight high current (5 amps) Form-C relays. These relays track software zones 1 through 8. The Relay/Transmitter Module also provides Municipal Box or Remote Station transmitters. A Unimode 200 equipped with an RTM-8F meets NFPA 72 codes for Auxiliary and Remote Station requirements. In remote sta- tion applications, the RTM-8F can be configured to transmit alarm only or alarm and trouble signals. Disable switches and indicators are provided on the module. Refer to Figure 2-35, "RTM-8F Module Installation," on page 50 and Figure 2-36, "RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module," on page 51, for additional information. PIM-24 Printer/PC Interface Module The Printer/PC Interface Module may be used to permanently connect a printer to the Unimode 200 for the purpose of printing a history report, walktest file or program listing. Printers require separate primary AC power. The PIM- . 24 module connects to the serial EIA-232 port on the printer using cable P/N 75267. The module mounts to the Ji 1 connector on the Unimode 200 main circuit board. The P1M-24 is also used to connect a computer for upload/down- load of programming data. Refer to the PK-9200W Off Line Programming Utility Manual for programming informa- tion. Refer to Figure 2-37, "Remote Serial Printer and Computer Connections," on page 52, for information on connections and "System EdiX" on page 61, for information on programming the Unimode 200 for use with a printer or PC. Note that the PIM-24 option cannot be used simultaneously with the DJM-485/ADT-LCD40 option. PK-.9200W Kit for Local Downloading The PK-9200W Programming Utility can be used to program a Unimode 200 directly from most IBM PC/XT/AT or compatible computers, including laptops and portables, equipped with a serial port. Unimode 200 program files can also be created and stored on the PC, then downloaded to the control panel. The PK-9200W Kit includes the Unimode 200 Windows-based Programming Utility software on 3W' disk, the Instruction Manual P/N 50684 and requires separate purchase of the PIM-24 Printer/PC Interface Module. UNI-COM Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter The UNI-COM transmits system status to UL listed Central Station receivers via the public switched telephone net- work. The UNI-COM is compact in size and may be mounted inside the host control panel or may mount externally in a separate cabinet. EIA-485 annunciator communications bus and filtered 24 volt connections are required. The UNI-COM transmits 198 points or 56 zones when connected to the Unimode 200. Refer to Figure 2-31, "UNI-COM Mounting to Unimode 200 (new versions effective 4/14/99)," on page 47 and Figure 2-32, "External UNI-COM Mounting in ADT-ABS8RF (preferred mounting method)," on page 48, for wiring details and "System Edit" on page 61, for information on programming the Unimode 200 for use with the UNI-COM. DIM-485 Display Interface Module The Display Interface Module is required to connect an ADT-LCD40 Series Remote Fire Annunciator to the Uni- mode 200 FACP. The DIM-485 plugs into connector Ji 1 located on the top right side of the Unimode 200 main cir- cuit board. Refer to "ADT-LCD40 Series Wiring" on page 88, for wiring details and "System Edit" on page 61, for information on programming the Unimode 200 for use with the ADT-LCD40. Note the the DIM-4851A DT-L CD40 cannot be used simultaneously with the PJM-24 module. Oocument#50101 Rev. G 6/17199 P/N50101:G 15 Accessories 1.7 Accessories 1.7.1 Dress Panel A dress panel (ADT-DP200 [red] for older backliox or DP- l-B [blue] for newer backbox) is available as an option (required for Canadian installations and included with Unimode 200C). The dress panel restricts access to the system wiring while allowing access to the membrane switch panel. Note that the Unimode 200 A ddressable Fire Control Panel installed with the dress panel, has received Factory Mutual (FM) approval. It is important to note that FM approval is contingent on the proper installation of the dress panel. 1.7.2 Battery Box BB-17F The BB-17F battery box may be used to house two 18 AH batteries. The battery box mounts directly below the Uni- mode 200 cabinet. The box is red and is provided with knockouts. BB-55F The BB-55F battery box may be used with the Unimode 200 to house two 25 AR batteries, two 60 AH batteries or one 100 AR battery. When the ADT-CHG-120 is mounted in the 1313-5517, two 25 AR batteries or one 60 AR battery may also be housed in the battery box. 16 Document#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Accessories 0 1.7.3 ADT-CHG-120 Battery Charger The ADT-CHG-120 is capable of charging 25 AH to 120 AH lead-acid batteries with the newer version of the Uni- mode 200 main circuit board which allows disabling of the FACP battery charger. The batteries and charger can be housed in the BB-55F Battery Box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control panel. Note that when using the BB-55F for housing the charger and batteries, a maximum 25 AH battery can be accommodated. For larger Amp Hour batteries, use multiple BB-55Fs. Refer to the ADT-CHG-120 Manual for additional information. WARNING: Do not apply A Cpower or batteries until the system is completely wired and ready for testing. Set the ADT-CHG-120 Voltage Select switch (SW1) to match the AC power source voltage (120VAC or 240 VAC). With the breaker at the main power distribution panel turned off, connect AC power wires to ADT-CHG- 120, TB 1. Wire the ADT-CHG-120 to the Unimode 200 as shown. Cut Jumper JP1 on the newer versions of the Unimode 200 main circuit board (shipping 4/14/99) to disable the FACP battery charger when using the ADT-CHG-120. Wire the batteries to the ADT-CHG- 120 but do not connect the Battery Interconnect cable until the system is ready for testing. FIGURE 1-2:ADT-CHG-120 Battery Charger AC Power In To Auxiliary T81 Oft ©°°°°©° BOOM cicli .. TB2 Charger M ca Battery Interconnect Cable Cut JP1 to disable Unimode 200 battery charger. 9200CHGF 25 AH 25 AH Cut wires from Unimode 200 battery cable connected to J3. (12 V) (12 V) Use wire nuts to connect wires. S Document#50101 Rev. 0 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 17 Accessories 1.7.4 Annunciators AFM Series LED Zone Type Annunciators The AFM Series Annunciators remotely display system status. The AFM/AEM- 16AT annunciators display zone alarm and trouble status. In addition, they provide remote Acknowledge, Silence, Reset and Drill functions. The AFM/AEM-32 annunciators display zone alarm status only and provide no remote system switch functions. For more detailed information, refer to the appropriate AFM Annunciator manual. Refer to "AFM and LDM Series Wir- ing" on page 89, for detailed wiring requirements and "System Edit" on page 61, for information on programming the Unimode 200 for annunciator use. AFM-16ATX AFM-32AX The Annunciator Fixed Module- 16ATX contains 16 red alarm and 16 yellow trouble LEDs, a System Trouble LED, an On Line/Power LED and a local piezo sounder with switches for Unimode 200 Acknowledge, Silence, Reset and Drill. The AFM- 16ATX is fixed at address '1' and will accept up to three AEM- 16ATF Expanders. AEM-1 6ATF The Annunciator Expander Module- 16ATF connects to the AFM- I6ATX and adds 16 sets of red alarm LEDs and yellow trouble LEDs. Three AEM- 16ATFs may be added to an AFM- 16ATX. The Annunciator Fixed Module- 32AX contains 32 red alarm LEDs, a System Trouble LED, an On Line/Power LED and a local piezo sounder with a local I Silence/Acknowledge switch. I The AFM-32AX is fixed at II address '1' and will accept one AEM-32AF Expander. AEM-32AF I The Annunciator Expander Mod- ule-32AF connects to the AFM- 32AX and adds 32 red alarm LEDs. The AEM-32AF is identi- cal in frontal appearance to the AFM-32AX. Only one expander module is allowed. ADT-AFM-16A L 1I L 1I E lI - 1_ EIE 1 =110 KIM E CM MEE KIM ADT-AFM-1 6AT The Annunciator Fixed Module- 16AT contains 16 red alarm and 16 yellow trouble LEDs, a Sys- tem Trouble LED, an On Line/ Power LED and a local piezo sounder with switches for Uni- mode 200 Acknowledge, Silence, Reset and Drill. The ADT-AFM-16AT is fixed at address '1' and communication is via the EIA-485 data line. The Annunciator Fixed Module- 16A has 16 red alarm LEDs. Mul- tiple annunciators may be used by setting all annunciators to Receive Only, except the last ADT-AFM- 16A in line. Each annunciator's address is internally fixed at '1', and communication is via the EIA-485 data line. The Local Silence/Acknowledge switch functions as local lamp test and silence for annunciator piezo. LEDs include On Line and Sys- tem Trouble indicators. B ALARM ZONE 1 0 B ALARM ZONE 2 B ALARM ZONE 3 B ALARM ZONE 4 B ALARM ZONE 5 B ALARM ZONE 6 B ALARM ZONE 7 B ALARM ZONEB B ALARM ZONE 9 B ALARM ZONE 1O B ALARM ZONE 11 B ALARM ZONE 12 BALARM ZONE I3 B ALRMZOi] B ALARM ZONE IS B ALARM ZONE 16 0 lB IB Ui ADT-AFM-32A The ADT-AFM-32A is similar to the ADT-AFM- 16A except it has 32 red alarm LEDs for annunciat- ing up to 32 points. 18 Document#50101 Rev G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G [i S S Accessories ADT-LCD40 Series Remote Fire Annunciators The ADT-LCD40 Series, consisting of the ADT-LCD40 and ADT-LCD40L, FIREALARM UNC'T"R are compact attractive 40 character backlit LCD fire annunciators that are 4 JYS MS ILL IAL 11 capable of displaying English-language text. They mimic the display on the Unimode 200 main control circuit board and will annunciate device type, point alarm, trouble or supervisory condition, zone assignment plus any custom alpha labels programmed into the control panel. They also provide system status LEDs to display power, alarm, trouble and supervisory conditions. Additionally, the ADT-LCD40 is capable of performing critical ADT-LCD40 system functions such as acknowledge, silence, reset and drill, remotely from the host control panel. If software Part Number #UNIMODE200 V3. 0 is installed in the Unimode 200, the A DT-LCD40 Series Annunciator must have software with a Part Number of 7387910 operate with the FA CR If soft- ware with a Part Number of #UNIMODE200V4. 0 or higher is installed in the Unimode 200, the A DT-L CD4O Series Annunciator must have software with a Part Number of #L CD40 V2. 0 or higher to operate with the FA CR Communication between the control panel and the ADT-LCD40 Series is accomplished over a serial interface employing the EIA-485 communication standard (DIM-485 option module is required). Up to 32 ADT-LCD40 Series Annunciators may be connected to the EIA-485 circuit. The annunciators may be powered from the host FACP or a remote UL listed filtered power supply such as the FCPS-24F. Refer to "ADT-LCD40 Series Wiring" on page 88, for detailed wiring requirements and "System Edit" on page 61, for information on programming the Uni- mode 200 for annunciator use. LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules - Graphic Annunciator The LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules, which consist of the ADT-LDM-32 master and LDM-E32F expander mod- ules, are used to provide an interface toa custom graphic LED annunciator. The master module provides power and control for a maximum of three expander modules. The ADT-LDM-32 and LDM-E32F have output connectors which are used to drive lamps or LEDs and input connectors which are used for remote switch functions. Refer to the LDM Series Lamp Drive Modules Manual for a complete description. See "AFM and LDM Series Wiring" on page 89, for wiring requirements and "System Edit" on page 61, for information on programming the Unimode 200 for annunciator use. The ADT-LDM-32 I The Lamp Drive Module ADT-LDM-32 has 32 alarm lamp/LED driver outputs which IIPII r'III sink current to system common (-) on activation. A single positive (+) voltage is required to supply total operating power for all lamps or LEDs when all drivers are activated. The ADT-LDM-32 provides a separate driver for system trouble and inputs for a local lamp 111111 test switch. A maximum of 16 external control switches may be wired to the ADT-LDM- NuN p 32. DIP switch SW3 is used to enable or disable the onboard piezo sounder, enable remote switch functions, select a flashing LED function for new alarms and troubles and other functions. Switch SW4 is used to configure the module to annunciate 32 alarms or 16 alarms and 16 troubles. A green On Line LED flashes to indicate ongoing communi- 0 cations with the host FACP. One ADT-LDM-32 supports up to three LDM-E32F mod- ules. The ADT-LDM-32 is supplied with four standoffs and screws for mounting to a a - CHS-4L chassis or custom backbox. The LDM-E32F I Each LDM-E32F expander module provides 32 additional lamp/LED driver outputs from J5, J6, J7 and J8. The expander module has a slide switch, SW4, for selecting alarm only or alarm and trouble annunciation and an input for a local lamp test switch. In alarm only mode, use only one ADT-LDM-32 and one LDM-E32F for a maximum of 56 alarm indi- cators and 8 system status indicators. In alarm/trouble mode, use one ADT-LDM-32 and SIN three LDM-E32Fs for a maximum of 56 alarm indicators, 56 trouble indicators, 16 status indicators and 64 optional control switch inputs. Multiple sets of ADT-LDM-32s with LDM-E32F expanders increase the system annunciation capabilities beyond 56 zones or points. This is possible by various settings of address switches SW and SW2 on the ADT-LDM-32 (refer to Appendices). Each LDM-E32F is supplied with a 26-conductor ° expander ribbon cable, four standoffs and screws. 0 r-- Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 19 Accessories 1.7.5 FCPS-24F Remote Field Charger Power Supply for System Power Expansion 0 The FCPS-24F is a compact, remote power supply with battery charger. This remote power supply consists of a fil- tered 24 VDC output that may be configured to drive up to four Notification Appliance Circuits [four Style Y (Class B) or two Style Z (Class A) and two Style Y (Class B)]. Alternately, the four Notification Appliance Circuits may be used as auxiliary filtered power configured for resettable or nonresettable operation. The FCPS-24F may be used in a number of different applications. It may be used as a remotely-mounted power sup- ply and battery charger powering up to four, coded or noncoded, Notification Appliance Circuits. Alternately, any or all of these circuits may be used as 24 VDC output circuits capable of powering 4-wire smoke detectors or any device that requires filtered power. These circuits may be configured as resettable or nonresettable outputs to expand FACP auxiliary system power. Notification Applianci Circuit Control Input (from FACP) Notification Applianc Circuit Control Input (from FACP) AC Power '/Style Z Notification Appliance or 24 VDC Output #1 (Notification Appliance or 24 VDC Output #2 '/Style Z Notification Appliance or 24 VDC Output #3 (Notification Appliance or 24 VDC Output #4 Battery Charger 0 Specific FCPS Trouble Application Contact Output Power One of the most common applications for the FCPS-24F remote power supply utilizes the NAC expander mode. In this application, one or two NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) are connected from the main control panel NAC output(s) to the remote power supply Control Input circuits. When these Control Input circuits activate (due to reverse polarity of the NAC output), the power supply will activate its corresponding outputs. NAC Control Input #1 controls power supply output circuits #1 and #2. NAC Control Input #2 controls output circuits #3 and #4. During the inactive state, the remote power supply supervises its NAC field wiring for short and open circuits. If a fault is detected, the supply will enter a trouble condition and illuminate the corresponding NAC trouble LED (Output Circuits 1-4). However, once the NACs are activated, the supervision is disabled and the circuits are no longer super- vised. Supervision of other power supply faults such as low battery, earth fault, AC loss and battery charger failure will continue and may be monitored via the independent trouble relay contact. If a specific application requires that all four outputs activate at the same time, only one NAC control input from the FACP is necessary. For this application, the NAC from the FACP is wired into NAC Control Input #1 of the remote supply and then a pair of wires are connected from NAC Control Output #1 to NAC Control Input #2. Refer to the FCPS-24F Installation, Operation and Application Manual for a complete description and examples of applications. A C304 Control Module, which can be located up to 10,000 feet (3,000 m) from the FACP, may be used to activate the FCPS power supply. The Control Module can be powered from the FCPS auxiliary 24 VDC power output (TB3 Terminals 8 & 9) and supervised by an EOL relay. 0 20 Docijment#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G H BB-17F Installation CHAPTER 2 Installation Carefully unpack the system and check for shipping damage. Mount the cabinet in a clean, dry, vibration-free area where extreme temperatures are not encountered. The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the panel. Locate the top of the cabinet approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor with the hinge mounting on the left. Determine the number of conductors required for the devices to be installed. Sufficient knockouts are provided for wiring convenience. Select the appropriate knockout(s) and pull the required conductors into the box. All wiring should be in accordance with the National and/or Local codes for fire alarm systems. Note: Effective April 14, 1999, the cabinet illustrated in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 will be discontinued. The dimensions for the new cabinet, which will be shipped beginning 4/14/99, are illustrated in Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 FIGURE 2-1 :Unimode 200 Cabinet Dimensions - older version Top D ED 0 (D C) Depth = 2.625" (6.668 cm) To remove entire knockout strike here. 7, - .. Door= 15.218'(38.654 cm) Backbox = 15.0" (38.1 cm) I Bottom _______Door = 14.718 (37.384 cm) 10 311 Backbox = 14.5" (36.83 cm) 1+ Depth = I (7.62 cm) I Depth = 4.75 (12.065 cm) To remove inner knocko t, strike here. r 71 - \. Battery Box = 8.5" (21.59 cm) _ ntg.1119, gggggg11-111-1111-11111-11111 Battery Box = 14.5' (37.384 cm) Document#50101 Rev. 6 6/17/99 P/N 50101:6 21 2.7' (6.86 I' (44.755cm) I - 15.12,0 (384050) (48 525 o TR-1-R Trim Ring 16 GA Ruby Red #18308 Steel a: Backbox Mounting 2.1 Backbox Mounting • Remove the main PC board assembly by unscrewing the four screws in the come-s of the board. Two stand- offs support the board in the center. Set the board aside in a safe, clean place. Avoid static ths;harge which may damage the board. Mark and predrill holes for the top two keyhole mounting bolts using the dimensions shown. Install two upper fasteners in the wall with the screw heads protruding. Using the upper 'keyholes', mount the backbox over the two screws. Mark and drill the lower two holes. Secure backbox by installing the remaining fasteners. Tighten all screws. When the location is dry and free of construction dust, reinstall the main PC board. FIGURE 2-2:Unimode 200 Cabinet Mounting - older version 0000 0 0 22 Document#50101 Rov.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Backbox Mounting The new cabinet illustrated in this Figure, will begin shipping on April 14, 1999. FIGURE 2-3:Unimode 200 Cabinet Dimensions - new version To remove To remove entire inner knockout, knockout, 0000000 strike here, strike here. Top Depth = 4.5 (11.43 cm) 71 -' Door = 14.75" (37.465 cm) Backbox = 14.5" (36.83 cm) Door = 17.114" (43.47 cm) Backbox = 16.9 (42.926 cm) Bottom 0 Depth = 4.75 BB-17F (12.065 cm) Battery Box = 8.5" (21.59 cm) IF 0 -0 Battery Box = 14-5"— (36.83 cm) Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G O 23 16.90 42.92 I 4.5'(11,43 cm) Backbox Mounting The new cabinet illustrated in this figure will begin shipping on April 14, 1999. FIGURE 2-4:Uflimode 200 Cabinet Mounting - new version 4.445 cm 5.08 cm 4.445 cm Ii I .75 + 4-Bock (3,81 cm) 150° of .... Box 3.81 cm I ____________________ ____________________ 4 14.50 (36.83 cm) 3.81 cm I v 1.50 _j_ 3.81 cm 11.6'(29.21 cm) 1,62° 4.115 cm 3937 cm Bock V 4-of Hinges Box ------------ 1• 0- 4.115 3.81 cm Hinge £ (3.61 cm) 1.50 1.75V. t i 4.445 cm TR4-R Trim Ring 24 Document #50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 PIN50I0I:G 4on) 1W (37.1350.o) 0 17.02 0 21 (4323 o.o) (5a 15 cm) 1.75 4.445 cm S Power 2.2 Power WARNING: Several different sources ofpower can be connected to this panel. Disconnect all sources ofpower before servicing. The panel and associated equipment maybe damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules or interconnecting cables while this unit is energized. UW Jig cni GRD NUTI ( HOT rB8 J3 LIFII 2.2.1 AC Power and Earth Ground Connections Primary power required for this panel is 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 amperes. Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and/or local codes. Use #14 AWG (2.00 mm 2) or larger wire with 600 volt insulation rating. Connect a wire from one of the mounting screws for the system transformer to a known solid earth ground. This connection is vital for maintaining the con- trol panel's immunity to unwanted transients generated by lightning and elec- trostatic discharge. 2.2.2 Battery Power S Observe polarity when connecting the battery. Connect the battery cable to J3 on the Unimode 200 main circuit board using the plug-in connector provided. See "Power Supply Calculations" on page 77, for calculation of the cor- rect battery rating. WARNING: Battery contains sulfuric acid which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can destroy fab- rics. If contact is made with sulfuric acid, immediately flush the skin or eyes with waterfor 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention. 2.2.3 DC Power Output Connections All DC power outputs are power-limited. FIGURE 2-50C Power Outputs Power-limited Nonregulated Special Purpose Power 2.5 amps, 24 VDC power for Notification Appliance Circuits. TB4 Terminal 1(+) and 2(-). Note. This power is unsuitablefor EJA -485 annunciation devices. Power-limited Nonresettable Power 300 mA, 24 VDC nominal filtered, nonresettable power can be drawn from TB4 Terminals 3(+) and 4(-). Power-limited Resettable Power 300 mA, 24 VDC nominal filtered, resettable power can be drawn from TB4 Terminals 5(+) and 6(-). 123456 Oocumenl#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 25 Standard Relays 2.3 Standard Relays The Unimode 200 provides a set of Form-C alarm and Form-C trouble contacts rated for 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resis- tive). The panel also provides a Form-A supervisory contact rated for 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive). Refer to Fig- ure 2-8, "Typical UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements," on page 27. Note that relay connections may be power-limited or nonpower-limited, provided that 0.25" spacing is maintained between conductors ofpower-limited and nonpower-lim ited circuits. FIGURE 2-6:Relay Connections SUPV ALARM I TROUBLE NOCNONCC NONCC TB3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 00000000 If using both power-limited and nonpower-limited circuits, leave one unused terminal between power-limited and nonpower-limited circuits. Power Power Limited Limited Note: If relays are used as power-limited circuits, paste supplied label to terminal block to indicate use of power-limited wiling. 2.4 Notification Appliance Circuits The Unimode 200 provides two Notification Appliance (bell) Circuits configurable for Style Y or Style Z. Each cir- cuit is capable of 2.5 amps of current. Total current drawn from these as well as other DC power outputs cannot exceed 6.0 amps. Use UL listed 24 volt notification appliances only. Circuits are supervised and power-limited. Refer to the ADT Device Compatibility Document for a listing of compatible notification appliances. The two NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) located on the main circuit board may be expanded via the FCPS-24F Field Charger/Power Supply. Surge protection for notification appliances may be provided by using one of the UL listed compatible surge suppressors listed in the ADT Device Compatibility Document. FIGURE 2-7:NAC Connections Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit (supervised and power-limited) Polarizec Polarize( Polarize Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit (supervised and power-limited - 4.7K ohm, 'A watt P/N 71252 UL listed) Bell Horn i Horn B+ A+ A- B- B+ A+ A- B- Note: Notification Appliance T I I T i I Circuit polarity shown in B 0000 I B Dummy Load all unused circuits alarm state. 21 0000 Ill________ 26 Document #50101 Rev G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements 2.5 UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet. All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25" (6.35 mm) away from any nonpower-limited circuit wiring. Furthermore, all power-limited circuit wiring and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through different knockouts and/or conduits. A typical wiring diagram for the Unimode 200 is shown in Figure 2-8. FIGURE 2-8:Typical UI Power-limited Wiring Requirements Power-limited Circuits Nonpower-limited Circuits Power-limited Circuits EIJ I//I' 1000000001 00 _______ LI AJ/0Ei RTM-8F Ri JJ. SYSTEMS ALL NORI1PL 18:12 P MON 83'04'96 N ° •1k NC L UI 13 UINO UUNC c 00 EE02-2 L-1 —0 a Power-limited Circuits Nonpower-limited Circuits )te: Output is nonpower- ited only if programmed municipal box output. AC Power RTM-8F UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements ° UII° Nonpower-limited and power-limited wiring must have a O. NO Power-limited Circuit minimum distance of 0.25" wire-to-wire. If this module is used to CNC Power-limited Circuit drive nonpower-limited and power-limited circuits, follow the I 0 NO z instructions below: 0 1C 0 NO Power-limited Circuit 1. Skip a set of dry contacts to maintain the 0.25" required INC Power-limited Circuit space between power-limited and nonpower-limited 0.. NO. —No connection circuits. F1 2. NC NO Nonpower-limited Circuit If this module is needed to drive power-limited and El"I NC 0 NO Nonpower-limited Circuit nonpower-limited relays that are next to each other, make no connection to the Normally Open contact which sepa- I I8 Nonpower-limited Circuit rates the two groups of relays. Refer to the typical wiring 7j INC Nonpower-limited Circuit diagram to the right. ° Refer to Figure 2-36, "RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module," on 00 Nonpower-limited Circuit page 51, for additional information on the RTM-8F. Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 27 Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit 2.6 Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit 0 The Unimode 200 communicates with addressable initiating, monitor and control devices through a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loop. This SLC loop can be wired to meet the requirements of NFPA Style 4 (see Figure 2-11), Style 6 (Figure 2-12) or Style 7 (Figure 2-13). Surge protection for the SLC loop may be provided by using one of the UL listed compatible surge suppressors listed in the ADT Device Compatibility Document. The SLC loop is allowed to leave the building only with the use of a UL listed surge suppressor found in the A DT Device Compatibility Docu- ment. Be certain to change the decade wheels on all detectors and modules from the factory setting of 'OO Isolator Modules Isolator Modules permit a zone of detectors and modules to be electrically 'isolated' from the remainder of the Com- munications Loop, allowing critical loop components to function in the event of a short circuit on the SLC loop wir- ing (see Figure 2-11, Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13). These are required to meet the requirements of NFPA Style 7. Monitor Modules Addressable Monitor Modules allow the control panel to monitor entire circuits of conventional normally-open contacts, alarm initiating devices, manual pull stations, 4-wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, waterfiow, supervi- sory devices (see Figure 2-19 and Figure 2-20) and conventional detectors (see Figure 2-21 and Figure 2-22). The ADT-BG- IOLX is an addressable manual pull station which contains a miniature monitor module providing point annunciation (see Figure 2-11, Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-26). Control Modules Through addressable Control Modules, the control panel can selectively activate Notification Appliance Circuits or Form-C output relays (see Figure 2-23 and Figure 2-24). Addressable Detectors Through the communications loop, the Unimode 200 communicates with addressable ionization, photoelectric and photoelectric/thermal detectors (see Figure 2-27). Device Capacity The capacity of each Unimode 200 includes up to 99 addressable detectors and an additional combination of up to 99 addressable pull stations, control modules and monitor modules. In addition, the panel supports two NACs. Note: Refer to Appendix A and the installation drawings supplied with each loop device for rating and specifications. TABLE 2-1: Communications Loop Performance Single Loop Loop Loop Open on Single Ground Shorted Shorted Shorted and Opened and Communications Loop on Loop Loop and Opened Grounded Grounded Loss Style 4 (2-wire) Loop Operation (meets NFPA 72 Style 4 requirements) Trouble1 Alarm Capability & Trouble2 Trouble Trouble Trouble Trouble I Trouble Style 6 (4-wire) Loop Operation (meets NFPA 72 Style 6 requirements) Alarm 1 Alarm Capability I Alarm Capability & Trouble I Trouble Trouble Trouble Capability Trouble & Trouble j & Trouble Style .7 (4-wire) Loop Operation3 (meets NFPA Style 7 requirements) Alarm 1 Alarm Capability Alarm Alarm Alarm Capability & Trouble Capability Trouble Capability Capability Trouble & Trouble & Trouble & Trouble & Trouble Trouble indicates that a trouble signal will be generated at the control panel during the abnormal condition. Alarm Capability indicates an alarm signal can be transmitted to the control panel during the abnormal condition. Loop operation meeting Style 7 requirements isolates entire physical zone on the communications loop from faults that occur within other areas of the loop. 28 Document#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit . Style 4 Wiring and T-tapping T-tapping of the SLC loop wiring is allowed for 2-wire (Style 4) configurations. The total resistance of any branch cannot exceed 40 ohms. Measure the resistance as illustrated below. The total wire length of all combined branches cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3,000 m). FIGURE 2-9:Style 4 T-tapping and Branch Resistance B Branch B ranch E Branch D Branch Branch A Loop Out Shield I I 4®56 A B B+ A+ B- A- For Each Loop: Add the lengths of all the branches on one loop. This sum cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3,000 m) using 12 AWG (3.25 min 2) twisted, shielded wire. Branch Resistance With power removed, short the termination point of one branch at a time and measure the DC resistance from the beginning of the loop to the end of that particular branch. The total resistance from panel to each branch end cannot exceed 40 ohms. Repeat this procedure for all remaining branches. In this example: Branch A + Branch B + Branch C + Branch D + Branch E = 10,000 feet (3,000 m) or less is Style 6 Wiring T-tapping of the SLC loop wiring is not allowed for Style 6 configuration. The total resistance of the complete wire run cannot exceed 40 ohms and total length cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3,000 m). Measure the resistance as illus- trated below. FIGURE 2-10:Style 6 Wiring Requirements No T-tapping Total length of the Communications Loop pair cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3,000 m) using 12 AWG (3.25 mm2) wire. Loop Out I I I I Return Loop Shield I 1(2)ø B+andB-OutputLoop A+ and A- = Return Loop 1 2 3 4 5 61 6 A B B+A+B- A- DC Resistance of the Communications Loop pair Communication Loop Out cannot exceed 40 ohms. JA~ With power removed, disconnect Loop Out and Return at the control panel, short the two leads of Communication Loop Return Communications Loop Return and meter Loop Out. Document #50101 Rev. 6 6117199 P/N 50101:6 29 CAUTION! Do loop wiring und any terminals. wire run to mai, supervision. ) to iices. s are eet Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit Style 4 Two-Wire Communications Loop (supervised and Power-limited) The 2-wire communication loop meets NFPA 72 Style 4 requirements and may be T-tapped. FIGURE 2-11 :Two-Wire Communications Loop SD300 ADT-BC-IOLX B+ A+ B- A- 000000 6 123456 Connect (+) to TB6-3 Connect (-) to TB6-5 30 Document #50101 key. G 6/17199 PIN 50101:G S CAUTION! Do loop wiring und any terminals. wire run to maii supervision. u are eet Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit . Style 6 Four-Wire Communications Loop (Supervised and Power-limited) The 4-wire communications loop meets NFPA 72 Style 6 requirements. Style 6 cannot be T-tapped. FIGURE 2-1 2:Four-Wire Communications Loop SD300 ADT-BC-10LX S AB B+A+B- A- I 000000 123456 Connect Loop Out to TB6-3(+) and T136-5 (-) Connect Loop Return to TB6-4(+) and TB6-6(-) Document #50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/N 50101:G 31 CP300 . 1300 olator Module is are 5. ADT-BG-IOLX 1300 Isolator Module CAUTION! Doi nals. Break win Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit Style 7 Four-Wire Communications Loop (Supervised and Power-limited) The 4-wire communications loop meets NFPA 72 Style 7 requirements. By flanking each communications loop device with a pair of 1300 Fault Isolator Modules, each device is protected from short circuit faults that may occur on other devices. For example, a fault on Zone 02 will not affect Zones 01 and 03. The isolator modules on either side of Zone 02 will open the loop. Zone 01 will still operate from power on Loop Out and Zone 03 will operate from Loop Return. Since the Unimode 200 will no longer be able to communicate with Zone 02, a trouble signal(s) will be generated for that device. No T-tapping or branching is allowed on this circuit. The ratings and characteristics are the same as for a 4-wire circuit meeting NFPA Style 6 requirements. FIGURE 2-13:4-Wire Communications Loop 1300 1300 Isolator Module Protected Premises Isolator Module '7 'A'' AB B+ A+ B- A- 000000 6 123456 Connect Loop Out to TB6-3(+) and T136-5 (-) Connect Loop Return to TB6-4(+) and TB6-6(-) 32 Document #50101 Rev G 6/17/99 P/N 50101:G Wiring the Signaling Line Circuit Shielded Wire Termination Requirements Shielded wire is recommended for use on the SLC loop, EIA-485 and EIA-232 circuits (refer to "Wire Requirements" on page 98, for additional wiring information). Proper termination of the shield is shown below for various applica- tions such as no conduit, partial conduit and full conduit. Nonshielded wire may be used on the SLC loop, however, the maximum length should not exceed 1,000 feet (300 m) and full conduit is recommended for optimum EMI and RFI protection. FIGURE 2-14:Shield Termination in No Conduit Shield Drain Wire SLC Loop + All Styles of Wiring Do not allow the shield drain wire to rl enter the system cabinet. Connect the drain wire to the outside of the cabinet SLC Loop - via a BX-type connector. Unimode 200 Cabinet FIGURE 2-15:Shield Termination in Full Conduit S The shield must not be connected to earth ground at any point. Unimode 200 Cabinet Shield Drain Wire SLC Loop I. SLC Loop- Shield All Styles of Wiring The shield drain wire must be connected to the shield terminal T136, Terminal 1 or 2. Do not allow the shield drain wire or the shield foil to touch the system cabi- net. For Style 6or 7, connect only one end of the shield to TB 6. FIGURE 2-16:Shield Termination in Partial Conduit Shield Drain Wire Nonshielded win etal box SLC Loop + SLC Loop - Unimode 200 Cabinet All Styles of Wiring Do not allow the shield drain wire to enter the system cabinet or the conduit. Connect the drain wire to the termination point of the conduit run (such as a single- gang box as illustrated in Figure 2-16). The conduit cannot be longer than 20 feet (6m). Document #50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/N50101:G 33 The Isolator Module 2.7 The Isolator Module The Loop Isolator Module (1300) is used to protect critical elements of the com- munications loop from faults on other branches or sections of the loop. The 1300 Loop In (-) continuously monitors the circuit connected to Terminals 1(-), 3(-), 2(+) and 4(+). Loop In (+) Upon power-up, an integral relay is latched on. The 1300 periodically pulses the Loop Out (.) Loop Out () coil of this relay. A short circuit on either side of the loop resets the relay. The 1300 senses the short and disconnects the faulty branch by opening the positive side of the loop (Terminal 2 or 4). This effectively isolates the shorted branch from the remainder of the loop. Once the fault is removed, the 1300 automatically reapplies power to the communications loop branch. Figure 2-11, "Two-Wire Communications Loop," on page 30, illustrates the use of an 1300 on a 2-wire communications loop meeting NFPA Style 4 requirements. Figure 2-13, "4-Wire Communications Loop," on page 32, illustrates a 4-wire loop meeting NFPA Style 7 requirements. 1300 100 34 Note: During afault condition, the Unimode 200 will register a trouble for each device isolated on the loop branch. In Figure 2-17, a short on any T-tapped branch off an 1300 Isolator Module on the communication loop meeting NFPA Style 4 wiring requirements, will be isolated from all devices installed both upstream of the 1300 (Communica- tion Loop In) and on the continuation of the loop (shown as a dotted line). As an example, if a short were to occur on Branch A of the first 1300 shown, the Isolator Module would disconnect Branch A and its devices from the rest of the communication loop, allowing all devices connected before and after that 1300 to operate normally. FIGURE 2-1 7:IsoIating Two-Wire Communications Loops rCOntnuauono heCommunaton Loop r — — — — — — I r — — — — — — — — — — - Communications Loop In 2 1300 ILIi• 1300 Branch B Branch 1-tapped Branches off of the Communications Loop 2.8 Module Addressing Monitor and Control Modules have two rotary decimal switches which are used by the installer to set the module address. Addresses from 01 to 99 may be set by positioning the left rotary switch to the value of the 1 Os' digit and the right switch to the value of the 'is' digit. For example, address 31 would beset by pointing the left switch to 3 and the right switch to 1 as shown in Figure 2-18. FIGURE 2-18:Module Addressing Switches 0 o___ 0 2 le's, 1 07 00 Document #50101 Rev .G 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 S [I1 The M300 Monitor Module 2.9 The M300 Monitor Module The M300 Monitor Module is an addressable module that monitors normally-open contacts and shorting-type alarm initiating devices. The supervised module circuits can be wired as NFPA Style B or Style D Initiating Device Cir- cuits. There is no limit to the number of contact-type devices installed on a monitor module circuit. Refer to Figure 2-19, "Style B Circuit using M300," on page 37 and Figure 2-20, "Style D Circuit using M300," on page 38, for wir- ing diagrams. Communications Loop Connections Connect the Unimode 200 Communications SLC loop to M300 Terminals l(-) and 2(+). The M300 occupies one module address on the loop. Use the rotary switches on the M300 to set the module to the required loop address. NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit Connect the normally-open contacts of the alarm initiating devices to a single 2-wire circuit as illustrated in Figure 2- 19, "Style B Circuit using M300," on page 37. Note that this circuit cannot be T-tapped or branched in any fashion and must be terminated across the last device by a listed ELR. Connect the circuit to M300 Terminals 6(-) and 7(+). NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit Connect the alarm initiating devices to a single 4-wire circuit as illustrated in Figure 2-20, "Style D Circuit using M300," on page 38. Note that this circuit cannot be T-tapped or branched in any fashion. Connect the 4-wire circuit to M300 Terminals 6(-) and 9(-), then 7(+) and 8(+). Test Switch The M300 includes a magnetic test switch located near the center front of the module. Activation of this switch will cause an open circuit indication in the Style BID loop. 2.10 The M301 Monitor Module The M301 Monitor Module is an addressable module that is functionally and electrically identical to an M300 Moni- tor Module (Style B circuits only), but offered in a smaller package for mounting directly in the electrical box of the contact-type device being monitored. Module address is set with these switches U,79 0\ LIT1t S 1 \ 7 ((')') 2') ADDRES () Loop (+) (yellow) ii (violet) (red) NFPA Style B Initialing Device Circuit Terminate with a 47K ohm, '/2 watt ELR (N-ELR in Canada). Loop (-) (black) The M300 and M301 Monitor Modules incorporate the following features: The Initiating Device Circuit is supervised and current-limited to 230 uA @ 24 VDC (nominal). The Initiating Device Circuit wiring may be up to 2,500 feet (760 m) or a maximum of 40 ohms for the M300 and 20 ohms for the M301. The Initiating Device Circuit provides the following services (DO NOT MIX): / Fire Alarm Service / Automatic/Manual Waterflow Alarm Service with normally-open contact devices / Sprinkler Supervision with normally-open contact devices The maximum SLC loop resistance, due to wiring, is 40 ohms. Document #50101 Rev, C 6/17/99 P/N.50101:G 35 Status LED Rotary Decade Address Switches I Test Position The M302 Monitor Module 2.11 The M302 Monitor Module 0 The M302 Monitor Module is an addressable module that interfaces and monitors UL compatible conventional 2-wire smoke detectors. Refer to the ADT Device Compatibility Document. The supervised circuit may be wired as NFPA Style B or Style D. Communications SLC Loop Connections Connect the Unimode 200 Communications SLC loop to M302 Terminals l(-) and 2(+). The M302 occupies one module address on the loop. Use rotary switches on the M302 to set the module to the required loop address. NFPA Style B Initiating Device Circuit Connect 2-wire smoke detectors to M302 Terminals 6(B-) and 7(B+) as illustrated in Figure 2-21, "Style B Circuit using M302," on page 39. IDC installation wiring must not exceed 25 ohms, 12-18 AWG (0.75 - 3.25 mm2) wire. Use a 3.9K ohm ELR across the last initiating device. NFPA Style D Initiating Device Circuit Connect 2-wire smoke detectors to M302 Terminals 6(B-) and 9(D-), 7(B+) and 8(D+) as illustrated in Figure 2-22, "Style D Circuit using M302," on page 40. IDC installation wiring must not exceed 25 ohms, 12-18 AWG (0.75 - 3.25 mm2) wire. Power Connections Power must be switched 24 VDC isolated, filtered and battery backed. Connect to M302 Terminals 3(-) and 4(+) as illustrated in Figure 2-2 1, "Style B Circuit using M302," on page 39 and Figure 2-22, "Style D Circuit using M302," on page 40. Test Switch The M302 includes a magnetic test switch sensor located near the center front of the module. Activation of this switch by test magnet P/N M02-04-00 will cause an open circuit indication in the Style B/D loop. M302 Monitor Module Notes IDC and power connections are supervised by the M302 and reported to the Unimode 200 Maximum current in alarm is 90 mA power-limited See "Power Supply Calculations" on page 77, for power supply calculations 36 Document #50101 Rev. 6 6/17/99 P/N 50101:6 The M302 Monitor Module Style B Initiating Device Circuit (Utilizing M300) The NFPA Style B IDC (Initiating Device Circuit), utilizing an M300 Monitor Module, is supervised and power-limited. FIGURE 2-19:Style B Circuit using M300 UL listed Power Supervision Relay (must be wired as last device on loop as shown). End-of-Line Resistor 47K ohm, '/2 watt resistor (N-ELR in Canada) 24 VDC 4-Wire Smoke Detector Manual Pull Station To Next Device on Loop +— [i Resettable 24 VDC 4-wire smoke detector power (300 mA max.) 000001 4 123456 24V (+) TB4-5 24V (-) TB4-6 Heat Detector + — --- -;= - 91L CAUTION! Do not loop wiring under any terminals. Break wire run to maintain supervision. M300 I Loop Out Shield I I A B B+A+B- A-T Ummode 200 B 000000 6 123456 SLC (+) TB6-3 SLC (-) TB6-5 Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 37 The M302 Monitor Module Style D Initiating Device Circuit (Utilizing M300) The Style D IDC (Initiating Device Circuit), utilizing an M300 Monitor Module, is supervised and power-limited. FIGURE 2-20:Style D Circuit using M300 UL listed Power Supervision Relay (must be wired as last device on loop as shown). + - + - + - A B B+ A+ B- A- T B IØØ®ø00I Ummode200 B 10000001 4 11234561 611234561 24V (+) T134-5 SLC (+) T136-3 24V (-) TB4-6 SLC (-) TB6-5 Note: An ELR is not required when wiring Style D (Class A). 38 3ocument#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G 123456 4 24V (+) TB4-5 24V (-) T134-6 [i The M302 Monitor Module Style B Initiating Device Circuit (Utilizing M302 Monitor Module) The NFPA Style B DC (Initiating Device Circuit) is supervised and power-limited. FIGURE 2-21:Style B Circuit using M302 End-of-Line Resistor 3.9K ohm (included) UL listed Compatible Smoke Detector UL listed Compatible Smoke Detector To Next Device on Loop + — UL listed Compatible Smoke Detector Resettable 24 VDC 4-wire smoke detector power (300 mA max.) - +e]IjJ + +, CAUTION! Do not loop wiring under any terminals. Breakwire run to maintain supervision. M302 Shield I A B B+A+B- A- T Unimode 200 B I® ® 0 0 0 0 6 I i 23 4 5 61 SLC (+) T136-3 SLC (-) TB6-5 Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 39 The M302 Monitor Module Style D Initiating Device Circuit (Utilizing M302 Monitor Module) The NFPA Style D IDC (Initiating Device Circuit) is supervised and power-limited. FIGURE 2-22:Style D Circuit using M302 UL listed Compatible Smoke Detector L UL listed To Next Device End-of-Line Compatible on Loop Resistor Smoke ± - 3.9K ohm I I (included) Resettable 24 VDC 4-wire smoke detector power (300 mA max.) B jo 0 0 (2) (3 (3 1 123456 24V (+) T134-5 24V (-) T134-6 fl UL listed Compatible CAUTION! Do not loop wirin Smoke g under any terminals. Break wire Detector run to maintain supervision. M302 Out Shield I I A B B+ A+ B- A- Unimode 200 B 1 (2) ® ® 0 0 I 34561 SLC (+) T1363 SLC (-) T136-5 40 Doc.meni#50101 Rev 6/17/99 P/N50101:G The Control Module 2.12 The Control Module The C304 Control Module is an addressable module that supervises and switches power to a Notification Appliance Circuit. The C304 can be wired as NFPA Styles W, X, Y or Z Notification Appliance or Speaker Circuits. Alterna- tively, the C304 module can be employed as a Form-C control relay. FIGURE 2-23:C304 Control Module - Alarm Polarity Loop (-) Loop (+) 24 VDC Power (-) 24 VDC Power (+) Style X/Z (+) Style X/Z (-) Style WfY (-) Style W/Y (+) Communications Loop Connections Connect the Unimode 200 Communications SLC loop to C304 Terminals 1(-) and 2(+). The C304 occupies one module address on the loop. Set the rotary switches on the C304 to the particular loop address required. NFPA Style W or Y Notification Appliance or Speaker Circuit Connect polarized alarm notification appliances or speakers to a single 2-wire circuit. Note that this circuit cannot be T-tappedor branched in any fashion and must be terminated across the last device by a 47K ohm, '/2 watt ELR (P/N A 2143-00). Connect the circuit to C304 Terminals 6(+) and 7(-). Refer to Figure 2-25 on page 43. NFPA Style X or Z Notification Appliance or Speaker Circuit Connect polarized alarm notification appliances or speakers to a single 4-wire circuit. Connect the circuit to C304 Terminals 6(+), 9(+), 7(-) and 8(-). Note that when wiring Style Z, do not install an ELR since one is built into the C304 Control Module. Notification Appliance Power Connect notification appliance power from Unimode 200 TB4 Terminal 1 to C304 Terminal 4 (+24 VDC) and Unimode 200 TB4 Terminal 2 to C304 Terminal 3 (-24 VDC). This power must be supervised by a UL listed Power Supervision Relay, wired as shown in Figure 2-25. Coded Operation Connect notification appliance power from either TB (NAC 1 Output) Terminals I and 4 or TB2 (NAC 2 Output) Terminals 1 and 4 to C304 Control Module Terminals 3 and 4. Be certain to place one ELR across the last device on the module for Style B wiring. Set NAC 1 or NAC 2, which is now being used to drive the C304, for appropriate coded function. Refer to "System Edit" on page 61, for additional information. Test Switch The C304 Control Module includes a magnetic test switch sensor located near the center front of the module. Activa- tion of this switch by test magnet P/N M02-04-00 will cause a short circuit indication for the Style W/X/Y/Z circuit connected to the module. C304 as a Relay Module To configure a C304 as a Form-C relay, the two break-off tabs, illustrated in Figure 2-24, must be broken off of the module. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to break off each tab. Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 41 The Control Module A Caution: Failure to break the tabs when configuring the module for Fonn-C operation can cause damage to the C304 module. Communications Loop Connections Connect the Unimode 200 Communications SLC loop to C304 Terminals l(-) and 2(+). The C304 occupies one module address on the loop. Set the rotary switches on the module to the particular loop address required. Contact Connections Wire the common and the normally-open or normally closed contacts to the module as needed. Contact Ratings Resistive: 2 amps @ 30 VDC' Inductive: I amp @ 30 VDC (0.6 PF) Pilot Duty: 0.6 amps @ 30 VDC (0.35 PF) 0.3 amps @ 110 VDC (0.35 PF) 0.3 amps @ 120 VAC (0.35 PF) FIGURE 2-24:C304 Control Module - Utilized as Form-C Relay + To next device - on Loop + gil) CAUTION! Do not loop wiring under any terminals. Break wire run to maintain supervision. ;4 + + C304 Unimode 200 I — + 6Common Contact Shield A B B+A+B-A- .11 Øgg i 2 3 45 6 5 Normally-Closed Contact 6 SLC (+) T136-3 ____ SLC (-) T136-5 Break off Tabs Normally-Open Contact 1. Certain electromechanical devices exhibit inductive loading characteristics. For these types of devices, derate the outputs to 1 amp. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for load characteristics by device. 42 Document#50101 Rev 0 6/17/99 P/N50101:G n The Control Module NFPA Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit (Utilizing C304 Module) All circuits are supervised and power-limited. FIGURE 2-25:Style Y NAC using C304 UL listed Power Supervision Relay (must be wired as last device on loop as shown). flT i. End-of-Line Resistor 47K ohm, 'A waft resistor (N-ELR in Canada) I Note: If more than one C304 NAC is provided, install the power supervision relay after the last notification appliance. 24 VDC Notification Appliance 24 VDC Notification Appliance To Next Device on Loop +- 24 VDC Notification Appliance CAUTION! Do not loop wiring under any terminals. Break wire run to maintain supervision. LIA1111 Out B_______ Ummode200 1 2 3 4 5 6 Resettable 24 VDC 24V (+) T1341 4-wire smoke 24V () T134-2 detector power (300 mA max.) Shield I I A B 13+A+13-A- 000000 6 123456 SLC (+) T136-3 SLC (-) T136-5 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 43 The Addressable Manual Pull Station 2.13 The Addressable Manual Pull Station The ADT-BG- lOLX is an addressable manual pull station with a key-lock reset feature. Installation To install a ADT-BG-IOLX pull station: 1. Connect the Unimode 200 Communications SLC loop to Terminal screws (+) and (-) on the ADT-BG-10LX. The ADT-BG- 1OLX is factory preset to address '00'. Set the address by using a screwdriver to turn the rotary address switches on the back of the unit to the appropriate settings. FIGURE 2-26:Addressable Manual Pull Station Wiring iL S I (-) Black (+) Red (-) Yellow I0/+-(+)Violet (+) Red ( ((-) Black A B B+ A-i- B- A- 000000 1 23 4 5 6 SL (+) TB 6-3 SL (-) TB 6-5 ADT-BG-1OLX (back view) 44 Document#50101, Rev G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Wiring Detectors 2.14 Wiring Detectors To install addressable detectors: Connect the Unimode 200 Communications SLC loop to Terminal (-) and (+) on the removable terminal block. If an RA400Z Remote LED Annunciator is being employed, connect the RA400Z positive terminal to the RA(+) terminal on the removable terminal block and the negative terminal to the RA(-) terminal on the remov- able block. Before installing the appropriate addressable detector head, set the detector's address on the head with a small flathead screwdriver. Mark this address on the head. Place the removable terminal block into the connector in the detector head. Be certain to properly align and snap-in securely. FIGURE 2-27:Wiriflg Detector with Removable Plug-in Connector Channel (+) Channel (-) W-1 RA 400Z Remote LED A nnunciator Document#50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/7V50101:G 45 n Optional Modules 2.15 Optional Modules The Unimode 200 supports option modules using connectors J6, Ji I and J16 on the main circuit board. There are four optional modules available for the Unimode 200: RTM-8F Relay/transmitter Module PIM-24 Printer/PC Interface Module UNI-COM Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter DIM-485 Display Interface Module (for use with ADT-LCD40 Series annunciators) Jumper JP4 must be cut before installation of the RTM-8F module to enable module placement supervision. Note that devices connected to the standard EIA-485 connector, the optional EIA-232 connector, the optional EIA-485 connector via the PIM-24 or DIM-485 modules or SLC loop may be protected from voltage transients by using one of the UL listed compatible surge suppressors listed in the ADT Device Compatibility Document. FIGURE 2-28:Option Module Locations Ill eente PIM-A nr flIM-4R I + - + - + - tRA-- T R*A+A-B- CCNOCCNOICC W'TlOI I 2 A 9 .1 A, F ø 1J — — — - - I—I I -- I — — — - - H JJ. o SYSTEMS ALL HORPIAL 10:1VAN* ELI ON 03/02/98 S S J17 71 8 TROUBLE ja J19 Cal PROTECT JP4 T99 13 11111111111 [J _IPl JP3 f GROUND ç $W2 FAULT LED \J 2.15.1 UNI-COM Universal Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter FIGURE 2-29:ADT-UBSIF. The UNI-COM transmits system status to UL listed Central Station receivers via the public switched telephone network. It is capable of reporting up to 56 software zones or up to 198 addressable points. The UNI-COM may be mounted directly to the Unimode 200 main circuit board or remotely in a ADT-UBS IF or ADT-ABS8RF enclosure. For additional information, refer to the UNI-COM Manual. 51 46 Document #50101 Rev .G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 116 accepts UNI-COM C Cut JP4 for RTM-8F supervision J6 accepts RTM-8F UNI-COM J16 J16 J. S NOAC UNI-COM Unimode 200 Nylon standoffs Optional Modules UNI-COM Mounting Options The UNI-COM may be mounted directly to the Unimode 200 main circuit board or remotely in an ADT-ABS8RF or ADT-UBS iF enclosure up to 6,000 feet (1,800 m) away from the control panel. A i/power must be removed from the control panel before making any connections to prevent circuit damage. The EIA-485 serial interface is connected between the control panel and UNI-COM, using twisted shielded pair wire. Power should be wired from the control panel's 24 VDC (nominal) filtered, nonresettable output to TB 1 on the UNI-COM (except when mounted inside the Unimode 200). Mounting Inside the Unimode 200 Enclosure FIGURE 2-30:ADT-ABSSRF Remove all power from the Unimode 200 by disconnecting AC and batteries. Install the supplied standoffs (three nylon and one aluminum) in the appropriate holes located on the right side of the Unimode 200 main circuit board, as illustrated in Figure 2-31, UNI-COM Mounting to Unimode 200, on page 47. Position J 10, located on the back of the UNI-COM, over connector J 16 which is located to the center-right on the Unimode 200 main circuit board, and care- fully connect. Secure the UNI-COM to the aluminum standoff with the screw provided. Refer to Supplement Document #51139 or the UNI-COM manual -for detailed installation instructions for old and new versions of the UNI-COM and Unimode 200. CA UTION. Damage can occur iffemale connector ii 0 is not properly aligned with male connector J16. The EIA-485 circuit and 24 VDC power are provided directly from connector J 16 of the Unimode 200. Note that a 120 ohm EOL resistor is not required on the UNI-COM EIA-485 terminals when it is installed inside the Unimode 200 cabinet. The EOL resistor is required at the last device (if any are installed) on the EIA-485 line external to the Unimode 200 panel. Programming See "System Edit" on page 61, for information on programming the Unimode 200 to function with the UNI-COM. FIGURE 2-31:UNI-COM Mounting to Unimode 200 (new versions effective 4/14/99) Aluminum standoff with nut required for transient protection • 1 2 ABB+AB.A- '01 222 00 8 81 I Supplied ribbon cable attached as illustrated to the right. Note position of colored stripe. J10 Document #50101 Rev. 0 6117199 PIN 50101:0 47 Optional Modules FIGURE 2-32:External UNI-COM Mounting in ADT-ABS8RF (preferred mounting method) Supervised and Power-limited EIA485 and power connections. Surge protection can be provided by using one of the UL listed compatible surge suppressors listed in the ADT Device Compatibility Document. +24 VDC Nonresettable Power (TB4) +24V 1 Solid Earth Ground ___ GND 3 Connection To Phone RS- 4 Lines SHIELD 5(5UPMSd) A B B+ A+ B- A- RS+ ism & 7 5ØØØØØØ ll + - TB1 1/ )7 Future E1A485 Ferrite Shield ..,\\ / I/Il Use Cores — PIN FBD--.. " RTM-8F MU, I °o INO p on L NC l L =0 I NO Install 120 ohm EOL I 01'151C resistor (P/N 71244) on 0 H NC T61 Terminals 3 & 4, if . NO last or Only device on oco . ______• C EIA-485 line. ° ®NC NO I TT I 0 LIC +—Unimode 200 Cabinet DIIJIIJDD g oocac 1 NC 111 ,177TICNO _ DDDQ 0 fl IHJJIII 11111111 M NC U—NO M 0 lq~j INC ____i NO UNI-COM in ADT-ABS8RF o _____ (shown with cover removed) JND rLso%...../ '._1\J (\ (Thr\ Ummode 200 Notes: This arrangement allows use of the UNI-COM simultaneously with the RTM-8F module and is the preferred mounting method. Ferrite cores (P/N FBD-1) are recommended for all applications. Recommended wire is 12 AWG to 18 AWG (0.75 to 3.25 mm2) twisted, shielded pair. If shielded wire is used, connect only one end of the siield: / shield may be connected to cabinet (earth ground) at fire alarm panel, or / shield may be connected to TB I Terminal 5 (sh:eld) at UNI-COM. Note that the shield end that is not connected should be insulated to prevent accidental grounding. Do not connect both ends of shield under any circumstances since a groundfault may result. Conduit is recommended for external wire runs (consult local building codes). Connect ground strap (supplied with ADT-ABS8RF enclosure) from Earth Ground terminal on the UNI-COM to a solid building earth ground. Conduit alone will not provide a reliable earth ground. UNI-COM may be located up to 6,000 feet (1,800 m) away from the host control panel. Refer to "Specifications" on page 9 for power requirements. UNI-COM TB 1 Terminals 6 and 7 are for future use. Make no connections to these terminals. 48 Document #501C1 Roe 0 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 Optional Modules 2.15.2 ADT-ACM-811 Relay Control Module The ADT-ACM-8R module provides eight Form-C relays with contacts rated for 5 amps. When installed with a Unimode 200 FACP, the ADT-ACM-8R modules provide relay activation for each of the 56 possible FACP zones plus special functions. Options exist to allow for alarm only or alarm and trouble activations per zone. Output activation for general alarm, general trouble, general supervisory, NAC fault, AC fail, walktest start and battery trouble are also available. Refer to the ADT-ACM-8R Manual Appendix for information on setting module switches for addressing and relay functions. FIGURE 2-33:ADT-ABS8RF Enclosure The ADT-ACM-8R is installed on the standard EIA-485 communication bus and wiring is supervised by the FACP. Power for the module must be power-limited and may be provided by the FACP or a UL listed power sup- ply such as the FCPS-24F. Up to 32 ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Modules EA may be placed onto the EIA-485 communication bus (if no other devices are installed on the bus). Removable terminal blocks are provided for ease of wiring installation and servicing. Refer to the ADT-ACM-8R Manual for UL power-limited wiring requirements and switch SW4 receive/transmit selection options. The ADT-ACM-8R module can be mounted remotely in an ADT-ABS8RF annunciator surface- mount backbox. CA UTION: It is vitally important that, following relay programming, all relays be testedfor correct activation by trig- gering zones and/or speqialfunctions at the FA CR It should also be noted: A DT-A CM-8R relays will activate during the Alarm Presignal sequence A Dr-A CM-81? relays will not activate during the Alarm Verification Retard and Reset Periods FIGURE 2-34ADT-ACM-8R Relay Control Module Installation Nonresettable 24 VDC Power Out TB4-3(+) & 4(-) EIA-485 TB5-1(+) & 2(-) Ummode 200 1 IçJ Document#50101 Rev. 6 6/17/99 P/N 50101:6 49 Optional Modules 2.15.3 RTM-8F Option Module Installation Insert the three supplied nylon standoffs into the holes located on the right-side edge of the Unimode 200 main circuit board. Insert the supplied metal standoff on the lower-right corner. Carefully align the pins of J6 on the main circuit board with connector J 1 on the RTM-8F option board. Press firmly on the RTM-817 until it locks in place on the standoffs. Be certain to tighten the screw into the metal standoff on the lower-right corner This is critical to the RTM-8F transient protection. Affix the terminal identification labels provided with the option module. FIGURE 2-35:RTM-8F Module Installation RTM-8F Option Module Standoffs I Main Circuit Board Use metal screw and standoff here n insert here IS B 'p4 i 0 9200RTM8 Main Circuit Board RTh4SS OFF %" nylon standoffs .Co o 011 NO UI' NC I NO I NC B NO iti1N NO n UU NO INC INC I 9 N U 1 c , NC NO RTM-8F W' aluminum standoff with nut required for transient protection 50 Document #50101 Rev G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G Optional Modules RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module Components FIGURE 2-36:RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module Local Energy Municipal Box Trouble LED (yellow) JP1 -Cut for Polarity Reversal Remote Station operation 0 NJ 2j c 4 NC Zone] I JP2 - Jumper Settings: 0 . NO I ri I a ~00 Alarm/Trouble Polaritysal NC Zone 2 Remote Station (Power-limited) ®NO __T . NC Zone 3 Note: If relays are used as NO power-limited circuits, paste Alarm Only Polarity Reversal H - supplied label to terminal 500 Remote Station (Power-limited) ® NC Zone I I IC block as indicated. NO [1 Local Energy Municipal Box jjj (Noniower-limited) o JCNC Zone 5 NO j. Switch Settings MIA NO C ® NC Zone ENO 1C NO oisconnJ;NC Zone 7 c NC Zone NO Normal T .- Metal Standoff Relay Disconnect Switch. 0 Transmitter Output normal rl normal (+) Transmitter Disconnect Switch - J1 (on back of circuit board) Transmter Disconnect Disconnect LED (yellow) LED (yellow) Notes: Zone Relay Contact Ratings: / Maximum Switched Power is 170W or 1800 VA / Maximum Switched Current is 6 amps / Maximum Switched Voltage is 30 VDC or 300 VAC / UL Rating is 6 amps @ 28 VDC or 120/300 VAC 1/8 HP @ 120/240 VAC (100,000 CYC) 1.5/0.8 A @ 120/240 VAC Pilot Duty is 30,000 CYC / Contact Material is Silver Nickel, Gold Plated Polarity Reversal Output: 24 VDC (nominal), 18.5 mA maximum rated current. Internal Resistance: 1,200 ohms (nominal). Intended for connection to the nolarity reversal circuit of a remote station receiving circuit (such as the RS-82) having compatible ratings. the RTM-8F is not suitable for separate transmission of both alarm and trouble signals simultaneously to a remote station. Output is power-limited and wiring can leave the building. Municipal box outout: Supervised for open circuit. Output is nonpower-limited and wiring can leave the building. Yellow trouble LED, when on, indicates open circuit condition. Check wiring and make certain Municipal Box is reset according to local codes. Maximum current (short circuit) is 0.6 amps. Maximum Voltage (open circuit) is 30.0 V. Maximum Wire Resistance is 3 ohms.. To prevent the yellow Trouble LED from turning on when the Transmitter Output is not used (no connections), move jumper J12 to the Local Energy Municipal Box position (bottom two pins) and install a dummy load across the Transmitter Output terminals as shown below. The dummy load is a 1N4004 diode. The cathode must be connected to the terminal labeled '(-) normal' in Figure 2-36 and the anode must be connected to the terminal labeled '(+) normal'. Polarity must be observed or the Trouble LED will remain on. Caution. Diode must be removed when using the Transmitter Output in order to properly supervise the connections. Transmitter Output ff:~ 1 N4004 Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 51 Plug this D139F connector into the EAI-232 port of the printer or PC. TBI - J1O Mao OdI PRWTER INT ACE MOD~ / NOCNONCCNONCC &LF D OPTlO 1 2 A B BA*B- A- ØØØØØØ TX RCV GND TBI S Printer/PC Interface Module 2.16 Printer/PC Interface Module A remote serial printer may be permanently connected to provide a hard-copy printout of program entries, history file and walktest data. The Printer/PC Interface Module P/N PIM-24 provides an EIA-232 conversion to adapt to most 40 and 80 column printers and most IBM PC/XT/AT or compatible computers including laptops and personal comput- ers. The PIM-24 module cannot be used simultaneously with the DIM-485/ADT-LCD40 option. A CA UTION: DO NOT connect aprinterorPC to the Unimode 200 FA CPifagroundfault exists on the control panel. Circuit damage may result. Remove all power (A C and DC) before installing or removing any modules or wiring. Programming Refer to "System Edit" on page 61, for printer programming instructions. Installation Remote printers and PCs require 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz primary power. Also required is the PIM-24 which includes the Printer/PC Interface Module, interface cable prewired to a DB9F connector as shown in Figure 2-37 and a DB25 adapter. Connect the Printer/PC Interface board to J 1 on the Unimode 200 main circuit board and the attached cable to the serial EIA-232 port on the printer or PC. Use the DB25 adapter if a nine pin connector is not available on your printer or PC. Note that a ground fault may occur on the Unimode 200 panel, dependent on the printer used, when this connection is made. For this reason, it is important that there be no preexisting ground fault on the panel. Con- sult the factory for recommended printers. FIGURE 2-37:Remote Serial Printer and Computer Connections Printer Configuration The PIM-24 is required when connecting a printer. Refer to the documentation supplied with the printer for addi- tional pertinent information. Set the printer's options as listed in the following table. TABLE 2-2: Typical Printer Settings COMMUNICATION SETUP BUFFER: LARGE DATA BITS: 7 PARITY: EVEN STOP BIT: I STOP BAUD RATE: 2400 PC Configuration The PK-9200W Kit includes the Windows-based Unimode 200 Programming Utility software on 31/2 ' floppy disk and the Instruction Manual P/N 50684. 52 Document #50101 Rev. 0 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 Programming/Read Status CHAPTER 3 Programming/Read Status NOTE: This chapter provides a detailed description of the FA CPprogramming. For your convenience, a Pvgram- m ing Flowchart has been included in "Screen Options Flowchart "on page 99. It may be helpful to follow along with the flowchart as this chapter is reviewed. The Unimode 200 is completely field programmable and requires no special software skills. Programming may be accomplished in one of three ways: The Autoprogram Feature - this method is very convenient for quickly bringing the Unimode 200 on-line or for program editing Manual Programming or editing, using the Unimode 200 keypad The Off-Line Programming Feature - this method allows creation of site-specific custom programs using a Windows-based computer. For programs requiring a large amount of data entry, this method may be preferred. A PK-9200W programming kit may be ordered for this purpose. When a programmed system is normal with no active alarms, troubles or supervisories, the 'SYSTEMS ALL NORMAL' screen will be displayed as shown below: SYSTEMS ALL NORMAL 10:OOA MON 03/02/98 In order to (1) program the system, (2) read system status, (3) print, (4) edit or (5) walktest, the ENTER key must first be pressed. After pressing ENTER, the screen shown below is displayed: 1 = PROGRAMMING 2=RD. STATUS 3=AC/BAT Pressing 1 will select system Programming, which may only be accomplished by an authorized serviceman. Before attempting to program the system, place the SW 1 Write Protect switch in the down position. SW 1 is located on the lower-right side of the Unimode 200 main circuit board. Refer to the illustration on page 6. If the switch is in the up 'Write Protect' position while attempting to enter the Programming Mode, the LCD will display the following: F E PROTECT!!! S BACKSPACE S in order to program the system, a valid password must first be entered. Once the correct password is entered, the serviceman may select Autoprogram or Program Edit. After programming is completed, return switch SW 1 to the Write Protect position. Documont#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 53 Initial Power-up 1 = Programming: There are two programming levels. 0 Program Level 1 is for system configuration in which data relating to device types, zoning, messages, etc. is entered into the system memory Program Level 2 is where a qualified operator can access features such as Disable, Clear History, Walktest, Time Change and Program Check. For Program Level 2, the SW 1 Write Protect switch should remain in the up 'Write Protect' position 2 = Read Status: Entering Read Status allows the user to read the status of any point/zone in the system plus display or print the history file or print the entire user program. The Read Status feature is NOT password protected. Read Status is explained in "Operating Instructions" on page 67. 3 = AC/BAT: Entering AC/BAT allows the user to read the battery voltage and the AC line voltage. The AC/BAT feature is NOT password protected. The following screen is displayed upon entering AC/BAT, if voltages are normal: F RY: 24.00 V E: 120.00 V "Initial Power-up" describes initial programming procedures for a new system. The same procedures are used to modify programming in an existing system. Make certain the SW 1 Write Protect switch is in the down position before attempting any Level 1 Programming functions. 3.1 Initial Power-up After completing the wiring of addressable devices to the SLC kop, power up the fire alarm system. Since the addressable devices have not yet been programmed into the FACP, their LEDs will not flash, the System Trouble LED will be on and the LCD display will alternate between the following two displays: TROUBLE IN SYSTEM PROGRAM CORRUPTED TROUBLE IN SYSTEM NO DEVICES INSTALL If the system remains unprogrammed, the piezo will sound after a few minutes. It can be silenced by pressing the Acknowledge/Step switch, but it will continue to resound until the system is programmed. 54 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G Programming 3.2 Programming Press the ENTER key. The screen below will appear: 1 = PROGRAMMING 2=RD. STATUS 3=AC/BAT To enter the programming mode, press '1'. The display will read as follows: FIKEYASSWORD, ENTER Entering the Level 1 serviceman password (default 632 10) will cause the following screen to appear (refer to "Pro- gram Change - Level One" on page 56): • O=CLR 1=AUTO 3=SYS 4=PWORD 5=LOAD Entering the Level 2 password (default 11111) will cause the following screen to appear (refer to "Program Change - Level 2" on page 63): 1=DISABL 2=CLR HIST 3=WALK 4=TIME 5=CHEK Passwords There are two factory set programming passwords, '63210' and '11111', which will access two different screens as indicated in the preceding section. From either of the screens, access to specific system and device programming may be obtained. All programming entries are stored in nonvolatile memory. The factory set passwords can be changed and a method exists to clear one or both passwords. Note that for Canadian applications, both passwords must be changedfrom the factory settings. If an invalid password is entered, the display will read 'INCORRECT PASSWORD. To exit from Programming operations at any time, press the Backspace (left arrow) key repeatedly. • Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 55 Program Change - Level One 3.3 Program Change - Level One S When the correct serviceman password is entered, the Unimode 200 will enter Level 1 program mode. At this time, the UNI-COM, if installed, will transmit a 'Serviceman on Premises' report to the Central Station. In this mode, the trouble relay is activated and the System Trouble LED flashes and cannot be changed to steady and the piezo sounder is off. The following display will appear: O=CLR 1=AUT0 2=POJNT 3=SYS 4=PWORD 5=LOAD 3.3.1 Clear Pressing '0' will clear all general system programming options described in "System Edit" on page 61, and all pro- grammed addressable devices from the nonvolatile memory of the Unimode 200. Before executing the Clear com- mand, the display will prompt the user to press ENTER in order to verify the command before the system actually clears programming data. CLEAR is a useful command when the unit is first installed, prior to autoprogramming. Note that it is necessary to 'A utoprogram ' qfter using the clearfunction. 3.3.2 Autoprogram Pressing '1' enters the Autoprogramming mode. The main purpose of autoprogramming is to allow the installer a fast and easy way to bring the system on-line as quickly as possible. The first time the system is brought on-line, it must be autoprogrammed. A utoprogram is also the only way to add or delete devices. Once Autoprograrn is selected, the Unimode 200 automatically polls all devices installed/wired to the SLC loop. The panel communicates with each individual addressable device and displays the type of device at each address location starting with detectors and then modules. While autoprogramming the system, the Unimode 200 will display the following: AUTOPROGRAM PLEASE WAIT Verification of each device address and type installed on the SLC may now occur. If information is correct, press the ENTER key, if incorrect, press the left arrow key to delete. In addition, adjective and noun descriptors plus zone assignments may be added to the display field per device address. If the Reset key is pressed at this time or the panel is allowed to time-out after 10 minutes of inactivity, a 'System Corrupted' message will appear. Be certain to step through all devices, using the Enter or left arrow key. The first time that autoprogramming is selected, all points installed on the SLC loop are identified. Default device type (monitor, smoke detector, control) and software zone assignments for each device are displayed. On any succes- sive enabling of the autoprogram feature, the LCD will display only the newly installed, deleted or changed devices on the SLC loop. 5 56 Document#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Program Change - Level One . Devices which match the program already in memory are not changed and are not shown to the operator. Devices which do not match the program (not the same address and/or type) are shown to the operator. Devices inadvertently set to the same address are identified and displayed on the screen. New Detectors For each new detector, the Autoprogram feature selects default program values and presents the information to the user. A typical example follows: PROGRAM SMOKE DET P01 <ADJ> <NOUN> ZOO In the preceding example: 'P' in 'P01' represents the actual type code (photoelectric) of the detector found at address 01. ('1' would repre- sent an Ionization detector) The ADJ (adjective) and NOUN fields are blank, but may be user programmed 'ZOO' is the default zone selection meaning 'general alarm' (main circuit board NAC outputs 1 & 2). Refer to "Software Zones" on page 81, for software zone assignments. After the new detector is displayed, press ENTER to accept the default information shown or press the left arrow (tri- angle to the left of ENTER) to reject the autoprogram information and not enter it into memory. In most cases, adjec- tive, noun descriptors and zone assignments will be added by using the following procedure. The Unimode 200 will lead you through the program editing process. A blinking cursor moves through the fields as you press the right arrow key (triangle to the right of ENTER). After moving into other fields, you may return to a previous field by pressing the left arrow. Change the blinking fields by pressing the up arrow key, the down arrow key or by pressing the appropriate numeric key. Custom words may be entered via the keypad. The alphanumeric operation of the keypad changes a blinking letter in the ADJ and NOUN fields. For example, to enter the letter 'R', repeatedly press the 7 key to step through 7, P, R and 5, stopping when R is displayed. Press the right arrow key (do not press ENTER at this time) to move to the next let- ter display position. To reduce the number of key presses, the user may also select from a library of stored words. The ADJ field library provides five-character words selected by the up arrow or down arrow keys from the following list of available words: (default of blanks) FIRST NORTH _2ND SOUTH _3RD _EAST _4TH _WEST _5TH FRONT FLR_1 CENTR FLR_2 _REAR FLR3 UPPER FLR_4 LOWER FLR_5 —MAIN RM The ADJ (adjective) field may be loaded from the library list above and then modified letter-by-letter if desired. Documcnt#.50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 57 Program Change - Level One Pressing the up or down arrow keys steps through the library. Once the up or down arrow keys are pressed, the blinking cursor moves to the last character of the ADJ field, assuming that the user will next want to move beyond this field. Pressing a key on the 12-key pad changes the letter indicated by the blinking cursor. Any alphanumeric character may be entered. Pressing the right or left arrow key moves the blinking cursor one letter right or left. When the right arrow key is pressed with the blinking cursor on the last letter of the ADJ label, the cursor will move to the first letter of the NOUN field. Altering the NOUN field is done in a similar way. Use the up or down arrow keys to step through the NOUN library which is listed below: (default of blanks) HVAC ROOM BASEMENT_ KITCHEN_ BOILER_RM LOBBY CLASSROOM OFFICE CLOSET_ PATIENT_ CORRIDOR_ RESTROOM_ ELECT._RM ROOM____ ELEVATOR_ STAIRWAY_ ENTRANCE_ STOREROOM FLOOR WING___ GARAGE ZONE___ HALLWAY In addition, the user may use the Recall/Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the ADJ or NOUN field as follows: 0 If the zero is pressed, a '0' is placed in the first letter position If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions, the entire ADJ field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmd, and the cursor moves to the last character of the field (Recall function). The Recalled ADJ or NOUN field may now be changed letter-by-letter If the Zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number '0-9', the number is incremented by one. If the last character is a letter, it changes to a'0'. If the last character goes from 9 to 0 and the characters to the left of the last character are also numbers, they are also incremented (overflow) The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the Zero key As an example, the user could quickly enter 'FLR_3_ROOM_305' as follows: The cursor is on the first letter of the ADJ field. Press the Zero key twice to display 'FLR3' With the cursor on the first letter of the NOUN field, press the Zero key twice to recall the display 'ROOM _304'. The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the NOUN field With the cursor on the last letter of the NOUN field, press the Zero key again to increment the room number to '305' Press the right arrow key to advance to the Zone field S. Select a zone number from 00 to 56. ZOO (default zone) is the general alarm zone. ZOI through Z56 may be selected to link software zones. I 58 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G Program Change - Level One To load the addressable device's program into memory at any time, press the ENTER key. After pressing ENTER, autoprogram displays the next new detector. If a detector had been previously entered into memory, but is missing (no answer), the display shows the following: PROGRAM SMOKE DET P01 NO ANSWER DELETE? If ENTER is pressed, the device is deleted from memory and autoprogram displays the next new device. If the left arrow is pressed, the program is unchanged and the next new device is displayed. After all new detectors are presented for editing, the autoprogram feature displays the modules on the SLC loop start- ing with the device found at the lowest address. Monitor Module Autoprogram Monitor Module Autoprogram is similar to Detector Autoprogram. When a new monitor module is presented, a typ- ical display might be: PROGRM MONITOR MO <ADJ> <NOUN> ZOO The major program editing for monitor modules is the selection of the Type Code on the first line. To change this selection, use the up and down arrow keys as the entire field blinks. The default selection is monitor as shown in the screen above. Note that selection of a type code may change the functional operation of the addressable device. TYPE CODE LABEL MONITOR PULL BOX HEAT DET SMOKE ZON WATERFLOW SUPERVISY AUTO SUPV TAMPER—SW ACK SW SILENC SW RESET SW DRILL SPECIAL FUNCTION NONE (DEFAULT) NONE NONE NONE CAUSES NONSILENCEABLE ALARM BECOMES SUPERVISORY POINT (see Chapter 4, Operation) BECOMES SUPERVISORY POINT (nonlatching supervisory) BECOMES SUPERVISORY POINT (see Chapter 4, Operation) NONE (BLANK LABEL) FUNCTIONS LIKE ACKNOWLEDGE SWITCH FUNCTIONS LIKE SILENCE SWITCH FUNCTIONS LIKE RESET SWITCH FUNCTIONS LIKE DRILL SWITCH Follow the same procedure as described in New Detectors section, for editing of the ADJ and NOUN fields. The default zone selection is ZOO (main circuit board NAC outputs 1 & 2) and may be set to ZO1 through Z56 if desired. See "Software Zones" on page 81. Document#50101 Rev. C 6/17/99 P/N50101:C 59 Program Change - Level One Control Module Autoprogramming A typical control module Autoprogram screen is shown below: PROGRM CONTROL CNN <ADJ> ZNN ZNN ZNN Control modules default to Zone 00 (general alarm). All type code options are silenceable except Relay and Strobes. The selection of control module type codes may change their function. Select the type code from the library list below. Use the arrow keys as described in the New Detectors section. TYPE CODE SPECIAL FUNCTION I CONTROL NONE (DEFAULT) Silenceable 2 BELL CKT Silenceable 3 HORN CKT Silenceable 4 SOUNDERS Silenceable 5 (BLANK LABEL) Silenceable 6 RELAY IGNORE OPEN CIRCUIT (Nonsilenceable) 7 STROBES Nonsilenceable Select an adjective descriptor from the library list shown in the New Detectors section. Use the arrow keys as described in the New Detectors section. Control modules may be assigned to a maximum of three software zones (refer to "Software Zones" on page 81). Zone ZOO represents general alarm. All control modules are assigned to Zone ZOO upon initial power-up. 3.3.3 Point Edit While displaying the Program Level 1 Menu screen (see "Program Change - Level One" on page 56), pressing '2' allows for editing of the point (addressable device) descriptor screens. These screens show the device type, the device address, adjective and noun field descriptors and the software zone locations that the point is assigned to. Point edit- ing is performed after autoprogramining and maybe done at anytime, except during an alarm condition. The follow- ing display will appear: POINT PROG. EDIT PRESS */#,AA,ENTER For example, select Detector address 3 program edit by pressing * key (* = detector), followed by numeric key '3', fol- lowed by ENTER. Select Module address 3 program edit by pressing the # key (# = module), followed by the numeric key '3', followed by ENTER. If there is no device installed at this address, the panel displays the next higher address where a device is installed. After editing is complete and ENTER is pressed, the display returns to the above menu. Rather than reentering the nexipoint number, the user may press the up or down arrow key to display the next lower or higher existing point. The point display formats and the method of editing are described in "Autoprogram" on page 56. 0 60 Oocument#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G VF = Alarm Verification SI = Silence Inhibit AS = Autosilence PS Presignal CD = Bell Code I Note: Bell 2 is fixed steady AN = Annunciators (N)one (N)one (N)one (N)one (M)arch Time (N)one Program Change - Level One 3.3.4 System Edit The System Edit function is selected by pressing '3'. The system edit screen appears as shown below for software releases prior to P/N UNIMODE200 V3. 0. This software does not support the ADT-LCD40 Annunciator. VF=N SF=N AS=N PS=N CD=N AN=N ST=4 REM=N Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the choices for each option and the left and right arrow keys to move from option to option. There are eight system function options for software releases prior to P/N UNIMODE200 V3. 0. The factory default selections and user option selections are shown below: FUNCTION DEFAULT SELECTION ST = SLC loop style (4) = Style 4 REM = AlarmlTrbl Reminder (N)o (Y) 120 seconds (Y) 60 seconds' (Y) 10 minutes' 3 minutes with 15 second Acknowledge' (N)one (T) = Temporal (C) = California = 56 Zones (ZU) = 56 Zones Annunciator with UNI-COM2 (P) = 198 Points (PU) = 198 Points Annunciator with UNI-COM2 (6) = Style 6 (Y)es = Sound onboard piezo every 15 seconds during alarm and every two minutes during trouble after acknowledge or silence key has been pressed. [1 1 Requires prior approval of Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2When the UNI-COM has a fault, this entry allows the FACP to display 'DAd Trouble' on the LCD display and printer hardcopy. The history file will also be updated with this information. For zone annunciation, up to 56 zones, use AFM Series Annunciators or LDM Series Annunciators. For 198 point annunciation, use the LDM Series Annunciators. The system edit screen appears as shown below for software P/N UNIMODE200 V3.0 or greater. This software is required to support the ADT-LCD40 Series Annunciators. FA/U I=N A=N P=N C=N N L/P=N S=4 R=N Oocument#50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/N50101:G 61 Program Change - Level One There are nine system function options for software P/N UNJMODE200 V4. 0 or greater. The factory default selections and user option selections for Version 4.0 are shown below. Note that Version 3.0 software provides the scone options but does not permit the coding of Bell Circuit 2 which is fixed as a steady output: FUNCTION DEFAULT SELECTION V = Alarm Verification (N)one (Y) 120 seconds I = Silence Inhibit (N)one (Y) 60 seconds' A = Autosilence (N)one (Y) 10 minutes' P = Presignal (N)one 3 minutes with 15 second Acknowledge' C = Bell Code (M)arch Time (N)one = steady Note: Bell Circuits 1 & 2 (T) = Temporal (C) = California A/U = Annunciators (N)one = 56 Zones with or without UNI-COM (ZU) =56 Zones Annunciator with UNI-COM2 (P) = 198 Points (PU) = 198 Points Annunciator with UNI-COM2 UP = ADT-LCD40 or (N)one L = ADT-LCD40 Series installed (requires DIM-485) Printer/PC in use P = Printer or local PC installed (requires PIM-24) S = SLC loop style (4) = Style 4 (6) = Style 6 R = Alarm/Trbl Reminder (N)o (Y)es = Sound onboard piezo every 15 seconds during alarm and every two minutes during trouble after acknowledge or silence key has been pressed. 1 Requires prior approval of Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2When the UNI-COM has a fault, this entry allows the FACP to display 'DACT Trouble' on the LCD display and printer hardcopy. The history file will also be updated with this information. For zone annunciation, up to 56 zones, use AFM Series Annunciators or LDM Series Annunci- ators. For 198 point annunciation, use the LDM Series Annunciators. 3.3.5 Password Change While displaying the Program Menu, press '4' to change either of two passwords. One high level password, defaulted to '63210', allows for point and system programming. A second lower level password, defaulted to '11111', allows for status changes such as: Disable points/zones Clear history file Walktest enable Time and date set Program check Pressing '4' will display the following: FNNN S4,ELEVEL 1 PW NN,E=LEVEL 2 PW Select the password to change by typing * or #, then enter the new password. As the new program or status password is entered, it is displayed. When ENTER is pressed, the display reads 'PRESS ENTER IF OK, NNNINN=NEW PRO- GRAM PW'. After ENTER is pressed, the new password is stored in EEPROM memory and the program returns to the program change screen. If BACKSPACE is entered, the password remains unchanged and the program returns to the program change screen. 62 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Program Change - Level 2 3.3.6 Load While displaying the Program Menu, program selection '5' sets up the Unimode 200 for transfer of its application database from/to a Windows-based computer. This may be used to save the program that exists in a Unimode 200 for security and future service reasons; or may be used to transfer a program created off-line to the Unimode 200. Refer to the PK-9200W Programming Utility Manual for additional information. When the Load option is selected, the fol- lowing screen will be displayed: CONNECT COMPUTER NOW RUN PROGRAM FROM PC. The left arrow key may be used to return to the program change screen. The PC connects to the EIA-232 printer interface (instructions provided with the Upload/Download software kit). Continue to press the left arrow key to return to the main program screen. 3.4 Program Change - Level 2 While the Unimode 200 system is normal with no active alarms, troubles or supervisories, the screen shown below will be displayed: SYSTEMS ALL NORMAL 10:OOA MON 03/02/98 To access the programming mode, the ENTER key must be pressed, causing the following screen to be displayed: 1 = PROGRAMMING 2=RD. STATUS 3=AC/BAT Pressing 'l' will cause the following screen to appear: KEY PASSWORD, ENTER Document #50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/N50101:G 63 Program Change - Level 2 Enter the Level 2 password (default = 11111) then press the ENTER key to access Programming Change Level 2. The screen shown below will appear: 0 1=DISABL 2=CLR HIST 3=WALK 4=TIME 5=CHEK From this screen, the available function choices include point Disable, Clear History, Walktest, Set Time and Check programming. 3.4.1 Disable Pressing '1' displays the following screen: DISABLE/ENABLE PRESS */#,J ,ENTER Press the * key to display detectors, the # key to display modules, followed by the device address, then the ENTER key. A typical display is shown below: 0 SMOKE DET P01 NORTH BASEMENT ZO1 A point is then displayed on the screen similar to a Point Edit display but with the current status label (ENABLE) blinking. The current status label may show: NORMAL, TROUBL, DISABL, ALARM, ACTIVE, PROGRM, TEST 01, ON, OFF. The status label can be changed to DISABL or back to its present status by pressing the up or down arrow keys. The disable status is entered/stored in memory by pressing ENTER. The display then returns to the DISABLE/ENABLE screen shown above. The operator may then enter a new point number, or may press up/ down to bring up the next lower/higher address point. The disabling of initiating devices that are in alarm or control points that are ON occurs after the RESET key is pressed. All disabled points will scroll on the LCD display and the system will remain in trouble until all programmed points are enabled. 64 Document #50101 Rev. G 8/17/99 P/1450101;G Program Change - Level 2 3.4.2 Clear History Pressing 7 displays the following screen: ENTER TO CLEAR HIST. BACKSPACE TO ESCAPE Press the ENTER key to clear the 500-event History file. Press the left arrow key (backspace) to exit without clearing the History file. Caution: Pressing Enter will clear all History events associated with this panel. Care should betaken to ensure this is the appropriate action. 3.4.3 Walktest If the Walktest is to be transmitted back to the Central Station via the UNI-COM, be certain to select point annunciation (refer to "System Edit" on page 61). Serviceman or users performing a system walktest must set the UNI-COM for walktest operation prior to placing the FACP into Walktest Mode. Refer to the UNI-COM manual. If '3' is pressed, followed by ENTER, the following is displayed: F2-PULSE KTEST 1-SILENT SOUNDERS Press '1' to perform a silent walktest with all sounding devices, control modules and the NAC 1 and NAC 2 outputs OFF. Select 7 to perform an audible walktest which sounds all silenceable control modules and NAC 1 and NAC 2 (if programmed as 'BELL_CKT' as explained in "Point Edit" on page 60) output during walktest. Disabled NAC out- puts will not activate during walktest. Each alarm and trouble condition (short and open) will be printed in real-time and stored in the 500 event history buffer. After pressing either '1' or '2', the screen shown below will appear: ENTER START WALKTEST BACKSPACE TO STOP If ENTER is pressed, the second line goes blank and the unit is in Walktest mode. Walktest may be stopped at any time by pressing the left arrow key (backspace), returning the unit to the main screen. A one hour time-out automati- cally returns the system to normal operation. Shorted/Alarm Condition When in Walktest, the panel responds to each new alarm and activates its programmed control outputs for four sec- onds, if those control outputs have been programmed for silenceable activation. It also stores each alarm in the his- tory file and printer with a 'TEST XX' status label. XX is a count of the number of times a device with this address has been tested. Note that this is a convenient way to identify two detectors that are erroneously set to the same address. A complete Walktest will cause a 'TEST 02' indication for the addresses to which both devices are set and no TEST report for the address that one of the devices should have been set to. Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 65 Program Change - Level 2 Note that if the system under test includes one or more enabled M302 monitor modules, the following may apply: If the M302 monitor module is used for a supervised, 2-wire smoke zone, alarming any monitor module in the system will result in the activation of programmed control outputs for an additional eight seconds or less. This is caused by the temporary removal of 24 VDC resettable power from the M302. The M302 reports this loss of power as an open condition in addition to the alarm condition. Open Condition 300 Series devices as well as both main circuit board NACs are monitored for fault conditions during Walktest mode. When a new trouble condition occurs, it activates all control modules programmed for Walktest and Bell Circuit 1, then shuts them off after an 8 second interval (4 seconds longer than alarms). The trouble status label is 'TEST T'. While in Walktest, the trouble relay is on and the System Trouble LED flashes (as in all of Program and Status change operations). The alarm relay is not activated. The LCD displays the following: ENTER START WALKTEST 3.4.4 Set Time and Date If '4' is pressed, the following is displayed: FCHIANGE TIME/DATE OA MON 03/02/98 The first digit of the hours is flashing and may be changed with the numeric pad. The right arrow moves to the next digit. The up and down arrows select (A)M or (P)M, day of the week, month, day and year. Pressing the ENTER key stores the time and date and returns to the Level 2 screen. 3.4.5 Check Program selection '5' performs a check on software zone assignments. The Unimode 200 looks for output devices assigned to a software zone that does not contain any input devices (detectors, monitor modules). If multiple devices fail the check, the up and down arrow keys are used to step through the list of devices. The user must return to point editing to correct any errors. Note that the system continues monitoring alarm conditions during all Programming and Read Status operations with the exception of Walktest. At the completion of system programming, switch SW (Write Protect) should be set to the Write Protect position to prevent inadvertent changes to programmed features. Slide the switch to the up position to select the Write Protect feature. Refer to Figure 2-28, "Option Module Locations," on page 46, for the location of SW I. 66 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Operating Instructions CHAPTER 4 Operating Instructions 4.1 Control Switches (Keys) 4.1.1 Acknowledge/Step S The Acknowledge/Step key silences the piezo sounder and changes all flashing LEDs to steady. Only one press is necessary regardless of the number of new alarms, troubles or supervisory signals. When the piezo is silenced, an 'Acknowledge message is sent to the printer and the history file. Multiple active events are scrolled on the display at a three second rate. Acknowledge also automatically sends a 'Silence Piezo' command to the ADT-LCD40, AFM and LDM Series annunciators. When more than one event exists, the first press of the Acknowledge/Step key silences the piezo and changes all flashing LEDs to steady. The second press of the key stops the scrolling and holds the event on the display for one minute. Subsequent pressing of the key 'steps' through each active event. 4.1.2 Alarm Silence The Alarm Silence key performs the same functions as Acknowledge/Step. In addition, if an alarm exists, it turns off all silenceable circuits and causes the Alarm Silence LED to turn on. It also sends an 'Alarm Silenced' message to the printer, the history file and the ADT-LCD40 Series. A subsequent new alarm will resound the system. 4.1.3 Drill Hold 2 Sec. When the Drill key is held for two seconds (time required to prevent accidental activations), the Unimode 200 turns on both main panel NAC outputs and all silenceable circuits (all control modules/NACs that are programmed silence- able) and turns off the Alarm Silence LED. The 'Manual Evacuate' message is shown on the LCD display. The same message is sent to the printer and history file. The Silence key operates on silenceable NAC outputs only. 4.1.4 System Reset Pressing the System Reset key turns off all control modules and NACs, temporarily turns off resettable power to 4- wire detectors, causes an 'All Systems Normal' message to be displayed on the LCD and stores 'System Reset' in the printer and history file. It also turns on all LEDs, piezo sounder and LCD display segments as long as the System Reset Key is held (lamp test). Any alarm or trouble that exists after System Reset will resound the system. Documnt#50I01 Rev. C 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 67 LED Indicators 4.2 LED Indicators The six LED indicators on the front panel operate as follows: AC Power This is a green LED which illuminates if 120 VAC power is applied to the system. Fire Alarm This is a red LED that flashes when one or more alarms occur. It illuminates stead:, when the Acknowledge/Step or Silence key is pressed. The Alarm LED turns off when the System Reset key is. pressed. Supervisory This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more supervisory conditions occur, such as a sprinkler valve tamper condition. It illuminates steady when the Acknowledge/Step or Silence key is pressed. It turns off when System Reset is pressed. Alarm Silence This is a yellow LED that turns on after the Alarm Silence key is pressed (precedeci by a fire alarm condition). It turns off when the Alarm Activate or System Reset key is pressed. System Trouble This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more trouble conditions occur. It stays on steady when the Acknowl- edge/Step or Silence key is pressed. The LED turns off when all trouble conditions are cleared. This LED will also illuminate if the microprocessor watchdog circuit is activated. 4.3 Normal Operation With no alarms or troubles in the system, the display message is 'Systems All Normal' along with the current time and date as shown below. To set the time and date, see "Set Time and Date" on page 66. F MS ALL NORMAL MON 03/02/98 The Unimode 200 performs the following functions at regular intervals while in normal mode: / Polls all devices on SLC loop. Checks for valid reply, alarms, troubles, etc. I Monitors AC input voltage and battery capacity / Refreshes LCD display and updates time I Scans keyboard / Performs detector auto test I Tests memory / Update/Reads EIA485 communications bus S 68 Documeni#50101 Rev G 6/17/99 P,N50101:G Trouble Operation is 4.4 Trouble Operation With no alarms, the detection of a trouble in the system will cause the piezo to sound, the System Trouble LED to flash and the trouble relay to activate. A message will appear on the LCD display indicating the trouble condition. The same message is sent to the printer and history file along with time and date. A ground fault will also cause the yellow Ground Fault LED, located on the bottom of the main circuit board, to turn on. Addressable Smoke Detectors For addressable Ionization or Photoelectric smoke detectors, the following is a typical message that could appear on the LCD display for a detector in trouble. TRBL # SMOKE DET P01 <ADJ> <NOUN> ZOO The information displayed in the first line in the example above provides the following information: The type of event - in this example, TRBL indicates Device Trouble The Specific Device Trouble for a Detector - the # symbol will be replace by a digit representing a specific trouble condition (refer to the list of Specific Device Troubles listed below) Type of device - in this example, SMOKE DET indicates smoke detector Point type and address - in this example, P01 indicates Photoelectric detector assigned to address 01 The information displayed in the second line in the example above provides the following information: <ADJ> - user programmed adjective descriptor from library list or custom entry (five characters maximum) <NOUN> - user programmed noun descriptor from library list or custom entry (ten characters maximum) Zone - zone to which the point is assigned The # symbol in the display will be replaced by a digit that represents the Specific Device Troubles as listed below: TABLE 4-1: Specific Device Troubles for a Detector Document#50101 Rev. 6 6/17/99 P/N 50101:6 69 Trouble Operation Monitor and Control Modules The following is a typical message that could appear on the LCD display for monitor modules and control modules in trouble. TRBL # MONITOR MO <ADJ> <NOUN> ZOO The information displayed in the first line in the previous example provides the following information: The type of event - in this example TRBL indicates Device Trouble The Specific Device Troubles for a module - the # symbol will be replaced by a digit representing a specific trouble condition (refer to the list of Specific Device Troubles for a module below) Type of device - in this example, MONITOR indicates a monitor module Point type and address - in this example, M01 indicates monitor module assigned to address 01 The information displayed in the second line in the previous example provides the following information: <ADJ> - user programmed adjective descriptor from library list or custom entry (five characters maximum) <NOUN> - user programmed noun descriptor from library list or custom entry (ten characters maximum) Zone - zone to which the point is assigned The # symbol in the display will be replaced by a digit that represents the Specific Device Troubles as listed below: TABLE 4-2: Specific Device Troubles for a Module 0 An Invalid Reply may be due to: 1 (1) incorrect pulse width received from a module no answer from a module due to either a complete device failure or removal from the SLC loop an incorrect identification code received, i.e. a monitor module replaced by a control module or vice-versa 2 Short Circuit Control Module - indicates a short circuit exists across a control modules NAC I3 1 Open Circuit Monitor/Control Module - indicates an open circuit exists on a control module's NAC or the monitor module's Initiating Device Circuit Pressing the Acknowledge/Step key will cause the piezo to silence and the System Trouble LED to turn on steady. This occurs regardless of the number of troubles, alarms and supervisory events active in the system (block acknowl- edge). When the Acknowledge/Step key is pressed and at least one new alarm or trouble exists in the system, the 'Acknowledge' message is sent to the printer and history file. If the trouble clears, either before or after Acknowl- edge, the 'Clear Trouble' message is sent to the printer as illustrated by the following example: CLR TRBL_# SMOKE DET P01 <ADJ><NOUN> ZONE# TIME and DATE If all troubles clear and there are no supervisory or fire conditions active in the system, the system returns to normal operation status and the 'Systems All Normal' message is shown on the LCD display and stored in the history and printer files. Trouble restore occurs even if the troubles were never acknowledged (auto-restore). If the Alarm Silence key is pressed when only troubles exist, it will have the same effect as the Acknowledge/Step key. The Alarm Silence LED will not be illuminated unless there was also an alarm in the system. If multiple trouble conditions exist in the system, they will be scrolled on the LCD display automatically at a three second rate. If a combination of alarms, troubles and/or supervisory conditions occur in the system simultaneously, only the alarms are scrolled on the display. If the Acknowledge/Step key is pressed, the display stops on the present 70 Document #50101 Rev. 0 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 Alarm Operation item for one minute or until the Acknowledge/Step key is pressed again. As the Acknowledge/Step key is pressed, the Unimode 200 displays events in the following priority order: Alarms in address order Supervisories in address order Troubles in address order 4.5 Alarm Operation Alarm operation is similar to trouble operation, but with the following differences: The piezo sounder produces a steady output, not pulsed The System Alarm (not Trouble) LED flashes ALARM: device name, type and address are displayed Alarms latch and are not allowed to clear automatically Alarms activate software zones (control-by-event logic) if so programmed Timers (Silence Inhibit, Autosilence, Trouble Reminder) are started * Alarms activate the general alarm relay and zone ZOO (NAC 1 and NAC 2) The trouble relay is not activated A typical alarm display would be: ALARM: PULL STATION M02 . <ADJ> <NOUN> ZNN 4.6 Supervisory Operation Supervisory operation is similar to alarm operation but with the following differences: The piezo sounder is a warbling sound The Supervisory LED (not Alarm) flashes The Display Status label is Active Supervisory relay is activated Silenced alarms are not resounded Timers are not started The alarm relay is not activated A typical Supervisory event would display: ACTIVE TAMPER M02 <ADJ> <NOUN> ZNN Note that, like alarms, supervisory signals latch and can be assigned to a software zone. Supervisory alarms do not cause resound as do other alarm conditions. Open circuits in supervisory wiring are processed by the Unimode 200 the same way as other trouble conditions. Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 71 NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit) Operation 4.7 NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit) Operation There are two NACs on the Unimode 200. NAC 1 is factory set to general alarm, continuous output, but may be pro- grammed to March Time, Temporal or California coding. NAC 2 is not programmable and is fixed as general alarm, nonsilenceable and may not perform coded functions. NAC 2 is typically used for strobes. 4.8 Control-By-Event Operation Each addressable detector and monitor module can be assigned to one software alarm zone. Control modules may be assigned to a maximum of three software zones. A general alarm zone (ZOO) may be listed for output (control) points, but it is not necessary to list ZOO for input points, as this is the default zone. ZOO is not activated by supervi- sory points. When an input device (detector, M300 series modules) alarms and is not disabled, it activates all software zones assigned to it. An output device (control module or NAC) that is not disabled is turned on when any of the software zones, to which it is mapped, become active. 4.9 Detector Functions Maintenance Alert Each detector is monitored by the control panel for its maintenance status. If a detector is within 80% of its alarm threshold for a 24 hour period, a 'maintenance alert' message will be automatically displayed, signaling that the detec- tor needs servicing. 0 Automatic Test Operation An automatic test of each detector is performed every two hours. The detector's sensing chamber and electronics are functionally tested for normal, safe operation. A trouble message is displayed upon failure of this test. System Reset clears this trouble. Type Code Supervision The Unimode 200 monitors hardware device type codes (CP300, SD300, SD300T, M300, M301, M302 and C304) at slow intervals. Mismatch of any type code, compared to the system program, will cause a device trouble. System Alarm Verification The panel may be programmed to perform alarm verification. Alarm verification applies to detectors only. Refer to "Alarm Verification (None or Two Minutes)" on page 73, for a description of the Alarm Verification Timer. 4.10 Time Functions: Real-Time Clock The Unimode 200 includes a crystal-based clock that provides time of day, date and day of week. Time is displayed as 12 hour time with month/day/year and is stored in RAM. If both AC and battery power are lost, the time must be reset. 72 Document#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Coded Operation - NAC I & NAC 2 4.11 Coded Operation - NAC I& NAC 2 Shown below are the pulse rate outputs via NAC 1 and NAC 2 when coded operation is selected: CONTINUOUS: No Pulse MARCH TIME: Pulses at 120 ppm (pulses per minute) TEMPORAL CODE: Pulses at ¼ second On, V2 second Off, 'A second On, /2 second Off, V2 second On, 11/2 seconds Off CALIFORNIA CODE: 10 seconds On, 5 seconds Off Note that in software versions prior to #UNIMODE200v4. 0, only NAG 1 can be coded. NAG 2 remains steady. 4.12 Presignal Presignal is used to delay output activation (control modules and NACs) while allowing for visual verification by a person. Once a detector or monitor module triggers an alarm, the onboard piezo sounds immediately, but the Notifi- cation Appliance Circuits are not activated for 15 seconds. During this time, if the Acknowledge key is pressed, the piezo is silenced and the notification appliances will not activate for up to three minutes. After three minutes, the NACs will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared. This does not affect monitor modules programmed as waterfiow or supervisory. Presignal operation requires the approval of the local A uthority Having Jurisdiction. 4.13 Special System Timers S 4.13.1 Silence Inhibit Timer (None or 60 Seconds) This option, if selected, prevents the Alarm Silence key from functioning for 60 seconds after an alarm. A new alarm during the initial 60 seconds will cause the timer to restart with a new 60 seconds. Silence Inhibit operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4.13.2 Auto-silence Timer (None or 10 Minutes) If Auto-silence is selected, the notification appliances will be silenced automatically after ten minutes of activation. Pressing the Drill key will restart the timer with a new 10 minutes. A uto-silence operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4.13.3 Trouble Reminder If selected, this feature causes a reminding 'beep' every 15 seconds during an alarm (after the Silence key is pressed) and every two minutes during a trouble condition (after the Acknowledge or Silence key is pressed). The 'beeps' from the onboard piezo sounder will occur until the alarm or fault is cleared. 4.13.4 Alarm Verification (None or Two Minutes) If alarm verification is selected, an addressable smoke detector's alarm is ignored for a retard time of 13 seconds and the detector's alarm condition is automatically reset. There will be no alarm indication at the FACP during the Retard period. A confirmation period of one minute and 47 seconds follows, during which a subsequent alarm from the same detector will cause the panel to immediately activate the appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at . the FACP. If a different detector alarms any time during the first detector's verification period, the panel will immedi- ately activate all appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP. If no additional detector alarms Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/7V50101:G 73 Style 6 Wiring occur within two minutes of the first alarm (13 second retard plus one minute and 47 second confirmation), the timer resets and the panel is ready to verify any new detector alarms which may occur. Osec. 13 120 Detector Alarm Verification RETARD 44 CONFIRMATION (Retard + Confirmation) Detector Goes Into Alarm Alarm Ignored I Control Panel Processes Alarm if Same Detector is Still in Different Detector Alarms Control Panel Immediately Processes Alarm No During First Detectors L Verification Period I 4.13.5 Waterfiow Circuits Operation If an alarm exists from a monitor module point that has a waterfiow type code, the Alarm Silence switch will not function. 4.13.6 Disable/Enable Operation Input points which are disabled do not cause an alarm or any CBE (Control-By-Event) activity. Disabled output points are held in the off state. All disabled points are treated as if they were in trouble, with the exception being the status label that will be displayed is DISABL. 4.14 Style 6 Wiring If the SLC is wired and programmed for Style 6 and a single fault occurs, the control panel will detect the fault and drive both ends of the line, fully recovering from the fault. The panel latches the trouble and displays it until the Sys- tem Reset switch is pressed. The display shows Style 6 trouble type. 4.15 Read Status Read Status functions do not require a password. The Unim ode 200 will continue to provide fire protection while in Read Status mode. Read Status maybe entered while the control panel is in alarm or trouble. If anew alarm or trou- ble occurs during these functions, the Read Status is exited to prevent confusion. Read Status Entry The operator presses the Enter key and the LCD display shows: 1=PROGRAMMING 2=RD STATUS 3=AC/BAT 74 Document #50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/N50101:G S S Read Status The operator presses '2' and the display shows: F AY POINT=*/#,AA RY=1 PRINT=2 From the display shown above, an operator may select one of the choices as listed below: To Display Point Status, the type of device to be read must first be identified by pressing the * key for a detec- tor or the # key for a module. The two-digit device address is keyed in next, followed by the Enter key To Display Zone status, press the * key then press the * key a second time. Next, key-in the zone number (1 - 56) and press Enter. The Up and Down arrow keys are used to view the next or previous zone To Display System Parameters, press the * key then press the * key again followed by Enter To Display Bell Circuit status, press the * key, followed by the # key and then the digit 'l' or '2', followed by the Enter key To display the 500-event History file on the LCD, press the '1' key followed by the Enter key. The Up and Down arrow keys are used to step through the entries in the file To Print Program Contents and Current System Status or History File, press the '2' and then the Enter key. A new menu appears which prompts the user to press '1' to print Program/Status or '2' to print History file During this and all subsequent operations except print operations, a two minute timer is started that will cause the panel to return to the previous display if no key is pressed with two minutes. Each key press restarts the two minute timer. A press of the left arrow (backspace) key deletes the previous entry. If there is no entry, it will cancel the Read Status operation and return to the previous display. System Reset will also cancel the Read Status operation. Display Point Display Point operations display addressable device status on the LCD display. After the status of the device is dis- played, the Up arrow key maybe used to display the status of the next highest addressable device and the Down arrow key may be used to display the status of the previous addressable device. The sequence of point display is Detector points 01 - 99, Module points 01 - 99, NAC bell circuits 01 & 02, System Parameters and Zones 1 - 56. A typical Read Status display is as follows: NORMAL SMOKE DET P01 WEST HALLWAY Z56 In the preceding display: / NORMAL is the present status (could be ALARM, TRBL_#, DISABL, etc.) / SMOKE (DET) is the device type P indicates that this is a photoelectric detector (could be I if ionization or PULL BOX, HORN CKT, etc.) and 01 is the device address / WEST HALLWAY is the custom label programmed for this device / Z56 is the assigned software zone If the point is not installed, a Read Status command to that point will result in a NOT INSTALLED message on the display. Document #50101 Rev. 6 6/17/99 P/N 50101:6 75 Read Status Read History 0 The Unimode 200 has a 500-event history buffer. Stored events include Point Status, System Troubles, and Acknowl- edge/Step, Alarm Silence, Drill and System Reset key presses. All events are recorded with the time and date. His- tory events are stored in volatile memory, therefore, removal of primary AC power and secondary battery power will clear the history buffer. To clear the History file without removing power, see "Clear History" on page 65. To view events in the history file, use the Up and Down arrow keys to step through the events. Print Program All user programmed options, including device types, software zone assignments and system parameters, may be printed. The printout also includes current system status. See "Printer/PC Interface Module" on page 52, for instruc- tions on connecting a printer. Print History The entire 500-event history file may be printed using the Print History feature. Refer to "Printer/PC Interface Mod- ule" on page 52, for instructions on connecting a printer. 76 Document #50101 Rev G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G Power Supply Calculations is Appendix A Power Supply Calculations A.1 The AC Branch Circuit The Unimode 200 requires connection to a separate dedicated 120 VAC branch circuit, which must be labeled Fire Alarm. The branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises. No other equipment may be powered from the fire alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously, with- out any disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm control panel. Overcurrent protection for this cir- cuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code as well as local codes. Use #14 AWG (2.00 mm2) wire with 600 volt insulation for this branch circuit. Use Table A-i to determine the total amount of current, in AC amps, that must be supplied to the fire alarm system. TABLE A-I: AC Branch Circuit Requirements @ I20VAC Number of Current Draw Total Current Unit Type Units (amps) per Device Unimode 200 1 X 2.3 = 2.3 R45-24 Charger* [ ] X 1.0 = ADT-CHG-120 X 20 = [ Charger Total AC Branch Current Required = amps *Discontinued and replaced with ADT-CHG-120. Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 77 Power Supply Calculations A.2 The Main Power Supply The Unimode 200 provides filtered power for operating the fire alarm control panel, operating external devices and operating the standby battery. The power for operating external devices is limited. Use Table A-2 (standby or non- alarm) and Table A-3 (alarm) to determine if external loading is within capabilities of the Unimode 200 power supply. Concerning smoke detectors: refer to the manufacturer's data sheet packaged with each smoke detector to find the standby and alarm current draws to use in the following tables. Be sure to power detectors from TB4, Terminals 5 and 6. TABLE A-2: Filtered Load in Standby - External Devices Connected to TB4 Only Device Type # of Devices Standby Current (amps) Total Current4 (amps) Main Circuit Board 1 X 0.08 = 0.08 RTM-8F [ j one max. X 0.009 = ADT-ACM-8R [ I X 0.0302 = AFM-16ATX AFM-32AX [ I one max. X 0.042 = AEM-16ATF AEM-32AF [ 1 2 - 0.002 - ADT-AFM-16AT ADT-AFM-32A 1 x 2 - 0.04 - ADT-AFM-16A [ I X 0.0252 = UNI-COM [ I one max. X 0.04 = ADT-LDM-32 [ I X 0042 = LDM-E32F [ I X 0.0022 = ADT-LCD40 Series [ ] X 0.0542 = 4-Wire Smoke Detector [ ] X [ 13 = Power Supervision Relay [ ] X 0.025 = CP300 [ I X 0.00015 = SD300 [ ] X 0.00015 = SD300T [ ] X 0.0002 = M300 [ ] X 0.0002 = M301 [ ] X 0.0002 = M302 [ I X 0.007 = ADT-BG-1OLX [ ] X 0.0002 = C304 [ I X 0.00021 = 1300 [ I X 0.0004 = Sum Column for Standby Load (Do Not Exceed 0.774 amps) = Notes: TB4, Terminals 1 & 2; nonregulated 24 VDC, 2.5 amps TB4, Terminals 3 & 4; filtered, nonresettable 24 VDC +1-5%, 300 mA, 120Hz ripple @ 10 TB4, Terminals 5 & 6; filtered, resettable 24 VDC +1-5%, 300 mA, 1201lz ripple @ 10 mV,,5 Refer to Current Limitations on following page 78 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G Power Supply Calculations 0 TABLE A-3: Filtered Load in Alarm - External Devices Connected to TB2 & TB4 Only Device Type # of Devices Alarm Current (amps) Total Current1 (amps) Main Circuit Board 1 X 0.168 = 0.168 RTM-817 [ ] one max. X 0.1462 = ADT-ACM-8R [ I X 0.158 = AFM-1 6ATX AFM-32AX [ one max. X 0.056 = AEM-16ATF AEM-32AF { ] X 0.018 = AFM-16ATF AFM-32AF { ] X 0.056 ADT-AFM-16A [ I X 0.0654 = UNI-COM [ ] one max. X 0.075 = ADT-LDM-32 [ ] X 0.0566 = LDM-E32F [ I X 0.018 = ADT-LCD40 Series [ I X 0.054 = 4-Wire Smoke Detector [ ] X [ ] = Power Supervision Relay [ ] X [ ] = Addressable Devices maximum draw for all devices X 0.27 = 0.2 Notification Appliances [ I X [ J = Sum Column for Alarm Load (Do Not Exceed 6.6 amps) = amps8 Current limitations of terminals: T134, Terminals 1 & 2 = 2.5 amps TB4, Terminals 3 & 4= 0.3 amps T134, Terminals 5 & 6= 0.3 amps TB and TB2, any one circuit = 2.5 amps Total current draw from all terminals cannot exceed 3.6 amps with standard XRM-1 transformer installed; 6.0 amps with both standard XRM-1 transformer and optional XRM-24 transformer installed. Note that total current from TB4, Terminals 3 & 4 and 5 & 6 must not exceed 0.600 amps. All RTM-8F Relays activated All eight ADT-ACM-8R Relays activated on a single module All annunciator LEDs on UNI-COM actively making phone call to Central Station. If the normally open contact is used, current consumption increases to 100 mA ADT-LDM-32 with LEDs on M302 Monitor Module current-limited at 90 mA in alarm This column must not exceed total system current draw of 6.6 amps Refer to next page for battery calculations using Total Standby and Total Alarm Loads. S Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 79 Power Supply Calculations Use the Total Standby and Alarm Load Currents calculated in Tables A-2 and A-3 for the following battery calculation. TABLE A-4: Battery Calculations Standby Load Required Standby Time in Hours Current (amps) X (24 or 60 Hours) = [ ] [ I Alarm Load Current (amps) Required Alarm Time in Hours X (i.e. 5 minutes = 0.084) = [ I Add Standby and Alarm Load for Required Ampere Hour Battery Multiply by the Derating Factor or 1.2 X 1.2 Total Ampere Hours (AH) Required'23'4 = Notes: The value calculated must not exceed the Amp Hour (AR) rating of the selecte i battery; i.e. if the total equals 6.5 AR, use the 7 AR battery and if the total equals 16.8 AR, use the 20 AR battery Up to 7 AH batteries can be located in the old Unimode 200 backbox, up to 12 AR batteries can be located in the newer Unimode 200 backbox 12 AR (older backbox) to 18 AH (older and newer backbox) batteries require ihe BB- 17F battery box If new Unimode 200 main circuit board is installed (allows disabling of FACP battery charger), the ADT- CHG-120 Battery Charger for 25 AR to 120 AR batteries (requires separate housing) 80 Document #50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Software Zones Appendix B Software Zones Setup and configuration of an addressable system is quite different than a conventional system. In a conventional sys- tem, assignment of input devices (smoke detectors, pull stations, heat detectors, etc.) to zones is straight forward. Wiring is direct from clearly marked panel terminals to any device assigned to a particular zone. Connection of out- put devices (horns, bells, strobes, etc.) in a conventional system is done by direct wiring of the output device to termi- nals marked 'bell'. With addressable systems, the same pair of wires is used to connect to all addressable input and output devices. Com- munications between the panel and all addressable devices takes place over one pair of wires originating from the control panel. Software programming is used to configure the system, versus direct wiring. Zone assignment is cre- ated via software means, hence the term 'software zones'. Setup of a Unimode 200 software zone is straightforward. Any zone may have a minimum of one and a maximum of 99 addressable input devices. Each detector is automatically assigned to a general alarm output. A zone may also have a minimum of one and a maximum of 99 addressable output devices. Use the charts on the following pages to help in 'zoning' the system. Note that monitor and control modules make up one group of 99 addresses. It is critical that addresses of detectors are not duplicated and that monitor and control module addresses are not duplicated. In the example on the following page: Zone 1 has the following addressable devices assigned to it: / SD300 photoelectric detectors with addresses '01' and '02' / M300 monitor module with address '01' / C304 control modules with addresses '03', '04' and '05' Zone 2 has the following addressable devices assigned to it: / CP300 ionization detectors with addresses '03' and '04' / M301 monitor module with address '02' / C304 control modules with addresses '03', '06' and '07' Zone 3 has the following addressable devices assigned to it: / SD300 photoelectric detectors with addresses '05' and '06' / CP300 ionization detector with address '07' / C304 control modules with addresses '03', '08' and '09' The example points out some of the key assignment features of the Unimode 200. Addresses of detectors are not duplicated. Addresses of monitor and control modules are not duplicated. The control module at address '03' is assigned to the maximum three software zones (providing for floor above and floor below). Detectors and monitor modules are assigned to one software zone. Be careful to properly plan the installation prior to installing any devices. S Document #50101 Rev. 0 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 81 Software Zones Correlation of Inputs and Outputs to Zones FIGURE B-I: Software Zoning Example Input Devices Zones Output Devices 82 Cocument#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Software Zones 0 TABLE B-I: Detector Programming Sheet Example DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact. max) NOUN (9 charact max) Address - Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact. max) NOUN (9 charact. max) 01 SD300 1 FIRST HALL - 51 02 SD300 1 ELEV. LOBBY 52 03 CP300 2 2ND FLOOR - 53 04 CP300 2 ROOM 210 - 54 05 SD300 3 3RD FLOOR - 55 06 SD300 3 MEZZANINE - 56 07 CP300 3 MECH. ROOM - 57 08 - 58 09 - 59 10 - 60 11 - 61 12 - 62 13 - 63 14 - 64 15 - 65 16 - 66 17 - 67 18 - 68 19 - 69 20 - 70 21 - 71 22 - 72 23 - 73 24 - 74 25 - 75 26 - 76 27 - 77 28 - 78 29 - 79 30 - 80 31 - 81 32 - 82 33 - 83 34 - 84 35 - 85 36 - 86 37 - 87 38 - 88 39 - 89 40 - 90 41 - 91 42 - 92 43 - 93 44 - 94 45 - 95 46 - 96 47 - 97 48 - 98 49 - 99 50 Document #50101 Rev. C 6117199 P/N50101:G 83 S Software Zones TABLE B-2: Module Programming Sheet Example MONITOR/CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact max) NOUN (9 charact. max) Address - Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact. max) NOUN (9 charact. max) 01 M300 1 WEST HALL - 51 02 M301 2 EAST STAIRWELL - 52 03 C304 1,2,3 2NDFLOOR - 53 04 C304 1 1ST FLOOR - 54 05 C304 1 EAST HALL - 55 06 C304 2 ELEV. LOBBY - 56 07 C304 2 MEZZANINE - 57 08 C304 3 3RD FLOOR - 58 09 C304 3 MECH. ROOM - 59 10 - 60 11 - 61 12 - 62 13 - 63 14 -64 15 - 65 16 - 66 17 - 67 18 - 68 19 - 69 20 - 70 21 - 71 22 - 72 23 - 73 24 - 74 25 - 75 26 - 76 27 - 77 28 - 78 29 - 79 30 - 80 31 - 81 32 - 82 33 - 83 34 - 84 35 - 85 36 - 86 37 - 87 38 - 88 39 - 89 40 - 90 41 - 91 42 - 92 43 - 93 44 - 94 45 - 95 46 - 96 47 - 97 48 - 98 49 - 99 50 84 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G S Software Zones FIGURE B-2: Blank Zoning Sheet Input Devices Zones Output Devices 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 85 Software Zones TABLE B-3: Blank Detector Programming Sheet DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact. max) NOUN (9 charact max) Address - Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact. max) NOUN (9 charact. max) 01 - 51 02 - 52 03 - 53 04 - 54 05 - 55 06 - 56 07 - 57 08 - 58 09 - 59 10 - 60 11 - 61 12 - 62 13 - 63 14 - 64 15 - 65 16 - 66 17 - 67 18 - 68 19 - 69 20 - 70 21 - 71 22 - 72 23 - 73 24 - 74 25 75 26 - 76 27 - 77 28 - 78 29 - 79 30 - 80 31 - 81 32 - 82 33 - 83 34 - 84 35 - 85 36 - 86 37 - 87 38 - 88 39 - 89 40 - 90 41 - 91 42 - 92 43 - 93 44 - 94 45 - 95 46 - 96 47 - 97 48 - 98 49 - 99 50 86 Document#50101 Rev G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G Software Zones 0 TABLE B-4: Blank Module Programming Sheet MONITOR/CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact. max) NOUN (9 charact. max) Address - Device Type Zone Number ADJ (5 charact. max) NOUN (9 charact. max) 01 - 51 02 - 52 03 - 53 04 - 54 05 - 55 06 - 56 07 - 57 08 - 58 09 - 59 10 - 60 11 - 61 12 - 62 13 - 63 14 - 64 15 - 65 16 - 66 17 - 67 18 68 - - 19 69 20 - 70 21 - 71 22 - 72 23 - 73 24 - 74 25 - 75 26 - 76 27 - 77 28 - 78 29 - 79 30 - 80 31 - 81 32 - 82 33 - 83 34 - 84 35 - 85 36 - 86 37 - 87 38 - 88 39 - 89 40 - 90 41 - 91 42 92 43 93 44 i - 94 45 - 95 46 - 96 47 - 97 48 - 98 49 - 99 50 Document #50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/N50101:G 87 S ADT-LCD40 Series Wiring Appendix C A DT-L CD40 Series Wiring The following drawing illustrates the wiring of two ADT-LCD40 Series Remote Annunciators to a Unimode 200 FACP. A maximum of 32 ADT-LCD40 Series annunciators may be connected to a single control panel. The EIA- 485 wiring must pass through a ferrite core (P/N FBD- 1) in each ADT-LCD40 Series. The illustration shows power supplied to the annunciators by the Unimode 200. For system applications requiring greater than the 300 mA of non- resettable power the Unimode 200 can supply or for remote locations, use the FCPS-24F Charger/Power Supply. The DIM-485 interface module is required when using the ADT-LCD40 Series. Insert the plastic standoff, supplied with the DIM-485, into the hole located near the Ji I connector on the top right side of the Unimode 200 main circuit board. Note that older Unimode 200 circuit boards do not have a hole near Ji 1, thus preventing the insertion of the standoff. Align the connector on the DIM-485 board with J 1 on the Unimode 200 main circuit board and align the hole on the DIM-485 with the standoff inserted into the main circuit board. Carefully seat the DIM-485 connector on the main circuit board ill connector and press to seat the DIM-485 on the standoff. FIGURE C-I: ADT-LCD40 Series Wiring ADT-LCD40 Series in grounded box Ferrite Core PIN FBD-1 EIA-485 24 VDC TB4 Terms 3(+)&4(-) 8 H a DIM485 000 J11 EE hi ONE Unimode 200 in grounded box DIM-485 Connections DIM-485 ADT-LCD403 Series Terminal 1 - Out (+) P1 Terminal 2 Terminal 2 - In (+) P1 Terminal 12 Terminal 3 - Out (-) P1 Terminal 4 Terminal 4 - In (+) P1 Terminal 32 Notes: The table above shows terminal to terminal wiring between the DIM-485 and one ADT-LCD40 Series Annunciator If more than one ADT-LCD40 Series is installed, the wiring to the DIM-485 In (+) Terminal 2 and In (-) Terminal 4 will be from the Out terminals of the last installed ADT-LCD40 Series The ADT-LCD40 Series must have the two supplied R120 (120 ohm) resistors installed across the In Terminals 2 & 4 and Out Terminals 1 & 3. These resistors are required for impedance matching Refer to the ADT-LCD40 Series Technical Manual Document #50520 for detailed wiring information. ADT-LCD40 Series in arounded box 12 II 1 i_i 2, 451Earth T IN I (-) EIA-485 Ground- (+) (-) EIA-485 I (+) optional EIA-485 Out shield (+) 24 VDC connection IN (-) 24 VDC () t-) 24 VDC Out Ferrite Core PIN FBD-1 88 Document#50101 Rev.G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G I AFM and LDM Series Wiring Appendix D A FM and LDM Series Wiring The following illustrations show the various configurations which may be wired utilizing AFM Series Annunciators. LDM Series Annunciators may be used in a similar manner. All illustrations show power supplied to annunciators by the Unimode 200. For system applications requiring greater than the 300 mA of nonresettable power the Unimode 200 can supply, use the FCPS-24F Field Charger Power Supply. The following figure shows a configuration which provides 56 zones of alarm and trouble indications, remote Acknowledge/Step, Alarm Silence, Drill and System Reset keys, System Supervisory, AC Fail, and Trouble indica- tions. Use AKS- IF keyswitch to prevent unauthorized actuation of control switches. Refer to the AFM Manual for further details. AFM- 16ATX AEM- 16ATF AEM- I6ATF AEM- 16ATF ___ ___ U:: ::u I ___I ___ ___ U:. ::u I •::iI I Ribbon Ribbon : : Cable ___ ___ ___ u: ___ ::u I 1:1:11 ___ ___ :: ::i I:IiL 8 Zones (Alarm & Trouble) 16 Zone (Alarm & Trouble) 16 Zone (Alarm & Trouble) 16 Zone (Alarm & Trouble) 4 switches (ACK, SIL, DRILL, RESET) System Trouble LED, On-Line/Off- Line Power LED, Piezo sounder Annunciator Power -12 to 18 AWG 2-wire EIA-485 circuit max. 6,000 0.1ä116P L.II [L•.II Ribbon SLIM MEE IMFH CM Data Communication Port: ElA-485 @ 20K Baud Jnlmode 200 Document#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N60101:G LE r i r i bI!I9J L 1 Ii,ij L 1 - rF i 89 AFM and LDM Series Wiring The following configuration provides 56 zones of alarm indication, a System Trouble LED, an On Line/Power LED, local piezo sounder and a local Silence/Acknowledge switch. AFM-32AX AFM-32AX I - U U — I) U 0 Fl=• I _____ El E)•11 13~ i19i 13 13~ — ci El= - U 0 —D I]1 U U U LJI 0 IJ U 01 —13 LI U 01 U Li _U UI —U U Til u u1 U Li I I u uI u u I . Li U1 ii Ii U L11 U LI U LII U 0 . .. U u r::7.1 F U The following configuration provides 16 alarm and trouble LEDs, System Trouble LED, On Line/Power LED, local Silence/Acknowledge, Drill and Reset remote switches and piezo sounder. Only one per system. ADT-AFM- 16AT : :1 I Unimode200 : :H IMS.MMS.t. - The following configuration provides 32 alarm LEDs, On Line/Power LED, System Trouble LED and local Silence! Acknowledge switch. Only one per system. SVSTD6 PL C 112 WJH ø3*2% 90 Document #50101 Rev. 0 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 0 0. 0 0 A1AW21010 00002 012221100 oljfl 20014 (DI ALJMZ000 2 0 L1A2100022 0 0 MAR12 £0014 0 _- 0 ALaa22za.e. 0 *1*12000.1, 0 *LAR1200IEI ALbfl2E7 *1120220101 12L120220152 0 *1*211220*12 0 M.12201E12 1211200002150 ALAMOZ00E 51 0 *10.12 2012 11 0AL12221201212 MAMOZAIIEIZ 12*0420022 A2*fl4 5051254 0 *JARMZ01EIO 0 *12012 LOSE 1* 01*054 2051215 0 AJAMLZMIE 12 ADT-AFM-16A ADT-AFM-1 6A Receive Only Receive/Transmit AFM and 1DM Series Wiring The following configuration provides 16 red alarm LEDs, System Trouble LED, On Line/Power LED, local Silence! Acknowledge switch and piezo sounder. All ADT-AFM-16A annunciators will show the same information. Power Unimode200 == 4M>1 0 *low ADT-AFM-16A Receive Only • Document#50101 Rev 0 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 91 AFM and LDM Series Wiring The following configuration allows the annunciation of 56 zones on the first two annunciators. 56 zones are annunci- ated on the second four annunciators. The same 56 zones are annunciated on the last four annunciators (which dupli- cate the previous set). • ReceiveOnly N No Control Switches I: , M 'ill 7"A. 17L _.LL_ a . ...... L .......... _... FE I . ii III 1.1.1 -II— III I • - I - •I I - - •• _____ - I. .1 - -. I. •I - - Receive Only System Switches Don't Function rwir urvu i.riu MM - -- -- L J 11 ____ FE L - - r 118 i 1 I!IU.UII r L 1 I1LLLL.ILI i L 1 E FE i " r 4-IM •''— j L 1 FE L i LE I1 L I1 L I] ____ r 1 ____ Ei r 1 Receive/Transmit Control Switches Function SEE CIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 92 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N 50101:G NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements Appendix E NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements The ADT Unimode 200 has been designed for use in commercial, industrial and institutional applications and meets the requirements for service under the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards outlined in this Appen- dix. The minimum system components required for compliance with the appropriate NFPA standard are listed below: Unimode 200 Control Panel Contains the main control board, cabinet (backbox and door), main power supply transformer and power supply. Batteries Refer to "Power Supply Calculations" on page 77, for Standby Power Requirements. Initiating Devices Connected to one of the control panels Initiating Device Circuits. Notification Appliances Connected to the control panel's Notification Appliance Circuit via a control module. The following additional equipment if needed for compliance with the NFPA 72 standards listed below: NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Standards for. Fire Alarm Systems for Central Station Service (Protected Premises Unit) and Remote Station Service requires: . MS-5012 for connection to a compatible listed Central Station DACR or Protected Premises Receiv- ing Unit. This unit must be installed as outlined in Figure E-1, "Central Station Service Using MS- 5012," on page 94. OR UNI-COM may be installed as illustrated in Refer to Figure 2-31, "UNI-COM Mounting to Unimode 200 (new versions effective 4/14/99)," on page 47 and Figure 2-32, "External UNI-COM Mounting in ADT-ABS8RF (preferred mounting method)," on page 48. NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System RTM-8F Relay/Transmitter Module for connection to a compatible listed Local Energy Municipal Box. This unit must be installed as outlined in Figure E-2, "Municipal Box Connected to RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module," on page 95. NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm System RTM-8F Relay/Transmitter Module for connection to the RS82 Remote Station Receiver. See Figure E-3, "Remote Station Connection Using RTM-8F Module," on page 96, for installation instructions for this unit. NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System Unimode 200 Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory contacts connected to Transmitter(s). See Figure E-4, "Proprietary Protective Signaling System," on page 97, for installation instructions for this unit. Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P17V50101:G 93 NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements NFPA Signaling Systems for Central Station Service (Protected Premises Unit) The following figure illustrates an example of Central Station Reporting using an MS-5012. The relay contacts from the Unimode 200 maybe used to trip any dialer UL listed for Central Station Services. The UNI-COM may also be used. Refer to Figure 2-3 1, "UNI-COM Mounting to Unimode 200," on page 47 and Figure 2-32, "External UN!- COM Mounting in ADT-ABS8RF (preferred mounting method)," on page 48, for information on installation. Notes: Reference the MS-5012 Manual for additional information Program the MS-5012 for slave operation SW2 Trouble/No AC switch located on the bottom right of the Unimode 200 main circuit board, must be posi- tioned in the down position for this application. This prevents the transmission of a trouble on the loss of AC power FIGURE E-1: Central Station Service Using MS-5012 PrhM Phone Line iI PhOno Uno Alarm a iT1 E1 a i- Sononthy 1. J 0 - Trouble MS-5012 =0= 0°'°° Phone Line Transformer PilniOry Aniho oni noni ornio 00 JOJGJJE Grou d Stud 750 irA Max CD (BID (B (B TB1 Chir90i0t DOME) ®R : *ellooV Eftk 12VDC \j Red Battery 2 to 7 AH White Must ConfeCt IC Neutralsolid Con ground AC wiring for DACT/FACP must be connected to the same branch circuit. ELR = 2.21K ohms (supplied with MS-5012) I • - - * - r BnAnA-B- T BnA,A-B- T 1 2 T A B B. An B- A- øøøeø® din , tel Bin C C oFeOoj IUO50WtiL0AD 2100001 'I°I ieøøøeø I - I Unimode 200 TABLE E-1: MS-5012 Connections to Unimode 200 MS-5012 Unimode 200 Alarm T132-1 T133-5 T132-2 T133-3 Trouble T132-3 T133-8 T132-4 T133-6 Supervisory T132-9 T133-2 T132-10 T133-1 94 Document #50101 Rev. 6 6/17/99 P/N 50101:6 NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements . NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System All connections are power-limited and supervised. This applications is not suitable for separate transmission of sprin- kler supervisory or trouble conditions. Notes: 3 ohms maximum loop resistance allowed for wiring from control panel to Municipal Box. Cut JP4 on the Unimode 200 main circuit board to supervise placement of RTM-8F module and circuit. Refer to Figure 2-8, "Typical UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements," on page 27, and "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements" on page 27, for information on UL power-limited wiring requirements. FIGURE E-2: Municipal Box Connected to RTM-8F Relay Transmitter Module Jumper JP2 must be in position LE MUNCPI BOX for use in this application o Co ITIC o NO I I 111 0-ICNO NC a Of 0O C I _j L C ®NC NO o 11111D]CO C I 0 N NO I C NC IC NO -IC U 0 NO rc- Nonpower-limited Polarities shown in © J, + alarm condition j ] (Dummy load with a 1N4004 - diode when no connection is made) Transmitter Output Document#50101 Rev. 0 6/17/99 P/N 50101:0 11 Circuit - Gamewell Model M34-56 Local Energy Municipal Box 95 NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System Notes: 1. Cut Jumper JP4 on the Unimode 200 main circuit board to supervise placement of the RTM-8F module. Refer to Figure 2-8, "Typical UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements," on page 27, and "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements" on page 27, for information on UL Power-limited wiring requirements. FIGURE E-3: Remote Station Connection Using RTM-8F Module ej LI RS82 Remote Station Receiver UL listed. I I N '? Refer to Instruction Manual for Remote Station Receiver ' .—. Model RS82. - _OprlODsL LOAD ALSO tilt) ORAlLY Slot Lopr000L Dolt CARD I till) CIRCIIIT SIDE IOO ICYIlYD + — SSOS Polarity Shown is A Normal Standby Cut Wl 0 •IIc° 'N. Ic Jumper JP2 must be in position øINO i i RTM-8FRelay ALARM/TROUBLE REVERSE—J 0 C Transmitter POLA RITYfor use in alarm and -J z INC Ml Module trouble transmission orALARM (not suitable for ONLY for alarm transmission only 1 0 NO transmission of 0 UIO INO c separate alarm and JP2 Jumper Settings: I trouble signals to l2 g Remote Station) U A larin/Trouble Polarity E11Z11 1CNO L001 Reversal Remote Station EfføIC OUNC F1Al 1 DI arm only 0ar1ty ØINO [1111 Power-limited o Reve,alRemote Station - + 96 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G RESET 0 Trouble Q Olar. I I Speed increase RESET 0 Trouble I I RV2 Qrii arn Motor ($Q) Speed Alas. Control 1ai, 15 Opt. 16 —= \ 0:1 16(§ - Potter Electric Signal Cs.pani, Tr.ns.itter Model EFT-C used to trans.it Alas, and Trouble Signals NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems FIGURE E-4: Proprietary Protective Signaling System Unimode 200 Addressable Fire Control Panel 1 I2 00C I Per Input See Note I l r0 °' Shunt- CentrI Office Line - Li.ited Eoergii - 15000C 0.1 pS nan Mcculloh Circuit Unimode 200 Main Board Form-C Alarm contact programmed to activate on General Alarm. Form-C Trouble contact which will automatically activate on any Trouble condition. _____ EtIU HV2 M. Potter Electric Signal Cpanr, Trang.itter Model EFT-C used to tranit Alas. and Trouble Signals Form-A relay contact programmed to activate on Supervisory condition. Notes: Connection between the Unimode 200 and the transmitter are supervised by the trans- mitter. This Unimode 200/Transmitter arrangement can be employed for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling System. Cooer Tper 12 VAC - Per Input See Note I - Return Feed - Shunt. Central Office 1.ine - I.i.jted Energu - 15000C 0.1 awns an NcCulloh Circuit Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 97 Wire Requirements Appendix F Wire Requirements T-tapping of the SLC loop wiring is allowed for 2-wire (Style 4) configurations. The total resistance of any branch cannot exceed 40 ohms. The total wire length of all branches cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3,000 m). Connecting external system accessories to the Unimode 200 main circuits must be carefully considered to ensure proper operation. It is important to use the correct type of wire, wire gauge and wire run length for each Unimode 200 circuit. Reference the chart below to specify wire requirements and limitations for each Unimode 200 circuit. Note: If the SLC loop is to be run in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, the risk of encountering problems can be greatly reduced by exclusively employing electronic sounders (such as MA/SS-24D) instead of more electron- ically noisy notification appliances such as electromechanical bells or horns. TABLE F-i: Unimode 200 Wire Specifications CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS WIRE REQUIREMENTS Recommended Circuit Wire Type and Max. Distance Circuit Type Function Limitations Feet (meters) Wire Gauge and Compatible Brands 12 AWG (3.25 mm2): Genesis 4410, Signal 98230, Belden 9583, WPW999 Twisted, shielded pair, 40 10,000 (3,000 m) 14 AWG (2.00 mm2):Genesis 4408 & 4608 ohms maximum per length SLC loop Connects to of Style 6 and 7 loops. 40 8,000 (2,400 m) Signal 98430, Belden 9581, WPW995 (power-limited) Addressable ohms per branch maxi- 4,875 (1,450 m) 16 AWG (1.30 mm2):Genesis 4406 & 4606 Devices for Style 4 loops' mum 3,225 (980 m) Signal 98630, Belden 9575, WPW991 18 AWG (0.75 mm2):Genesis 4402 & 4602 Signal 98300, Belden 9574, WPW975 Untwisted, unshielded pair 1,000 (300 m) 12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2) EIA-485 Connects to Twisted, shielded pairwith (power-limite d) annunciator a characteristic impedance 6,000 (1,800 m) 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) modules of 120 ohms PlM-24 output EIA-22 Connects to Twisted, shielded pair 50 (15 m) 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) minimum (power-limited) remote printer and PC computer M300 and Maximum loop wire resis- M301 Initiating Device tanCe is 40 ohms for the 2,500 (760 m) 12-18 AWG (3.25 -0.75 mm2) (power-limited) Circuit M300 and 20 ohms for the M30l No more than a 2.4 volt M302 Initiating Device drop allowed at end of cir- 2,500 (760 m) 12-18 AWG (3.25 -0.75 mm2) (power-limited) Circuit cuit. Maximum loop wire resistance is 25 ohms C304 Notification In alarm, no more than a Distance limitation (power-limited) Appliance 1.2 volt drop allowed at Set by 1.2 volt maxi- 12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2) Circuit end of circuit mum line drop 24 VI.)C filtered Connects to . No more than 1.2 volt drop Distance limitation resettable and annunciators and allowed from supply set by 1.2 volt maxi- 12-18 AWG (3.25 -0.75 mm2) nonresettable other . source to end of any mum line drop (power-limited) accessories branch _______ 24 VDC Connects to No more than 1.2 volt drop Distance limitation nonregulated C304 control allowed from supply set by 1.2 volt maxi- 12-18 AWG (3.25-0.75 mm2) (power-limited) modules and source to end of any mum line drop . n accessoes branch ADT-CHG-120 Remote second- 12 AWG (3.25 mm2) in 20 (6 m) 12-18 AWG (3.25 -0.75 mm) ary power source conduit 1. When using untwisted, unshielded wire, full conduit is recommended for optimum EMIJRFI protection. 98 Document #50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:G Screen Options Flowchart Appendix G Screen Options Flowchart (Software P/N UNIMODE200 V3.0 or greater) Trouble in System No Device Installed TRBL #(type><addr> SYSTEM <adj>(noun> Z## (SYSTEM NORMAL (UNPROGRAMMED SYSTEM) TROUBLE) __________ Trouble in System Press Program Corrupted \'ENTER _) 1Programming 2=Read Status 3=AC/BAT Write Qtet Press '1 Key Password, 'ENTER' Press '2' Continued on Next Page Press '3' Battery: 24V AC Line: 120V Jress11ii 1) 1Disable 2Clr Hist 3Walk 4Time 5=Chek I ( _____ lhangeTime/Da Disable/Enablq ( Clear EventWalktest ( Program /ress 1 \ress Press /ress '5" \PS.int_,,)File \.heck__j/ I I Disable/Enable I I Iwa11est 1Silen IProgram Check OK Press *I#, AA,ENTER I2'u15e Sounder Ietest Panel Now ENTER to Clear Hist I te I (Press '63210"\ IBackspace to Escape 00-.00A TUE 00/00/00 \ress'ENTE3 0 = Cir I = Auto 2 = Point 3 = Sys 4 = Pword 5 = Load I I 7lrA/U=M (Press '0' \ (Press'1' \ f'ress'3' \ (press'4' \ (ress'5' Pess'ENTE>) ess'ENTE)ress'ENTERJ ess_'ENTE)I ess ENTE Autoprogram =N IN A-N P=N C=M [Run onnect Computer Now Please Wait L/P=N S=4 R=N Program From PC ENTER to Clear Program Point Program Edit , NNN N, E=Level I PW Backspace to Escape Press *,/#, AA, ENTER #, NNNNN, E=Level 2 PW Document #50101 Rev. G 6117199 P/N50101:G 99 Screen Options Flowchart Press '2' Display Point = I#, A History = I Print = 2 Press *AA \( Press#AA Press* VPress**AA 'y Press *#AA '1Press1 ress ENTER)\Press ENTER)( Press ENTERPress ENTER APrEss 'ENTER) Press 2' EXAMPLE: I I EXAMPLE: I I EVENT HISTORY START NORMAL MONITOR MOI OFF SOFTWARE ZONE EVENTS IN HIST:XXXX EXAMPLE: V=N 1N A=N P=N C=M EXAMPLE: NORMAL SMOKE DET 101 A/tJ=M L/P=N S=4 R=N OFF BELL CKT BOI Press '1' Press '2' ENTER ENTER Program/Status Print I I Text inside bcx actually I I appears in LCD display Text inside oval indi- cates key press Proct Write Protect Switch on the Unimode 200 mother- 100 Document#50101 RevG 6/17/99 ?.'N50101:G History Print Notes • S Uacument#50101 Rev. G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 101 Notes 0 I 102 Docur7ent,15010 Rev. G 6/17/99 PIN 50101:,3 . Notes Oocumeni#50101 Rev G 6/17/99 P/N50101:G 103 LISTING No. CATEGORY: LISTEE: DESIGN: CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE 7165-1574:158 Page 1 of 1 Control Unit (Non High-Rise) ADT Security Services, Inc., 695 Route 46 West, Suite 200, Fairfield, NJ 07004-1561 Contact: Ron Dalton *(310) 619-2342 FAX *(310) 619-2208 Model Unimode-200 fire alarm control unit. Local, auxiliary, remote station, proprietary (protective premises). Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. System components: Unimode-200 RTM-8F ZDM-1 6F PIM-24 ADT-LCD-40, ADT-LCD-40L Main Board Relay Module Annunciator Module Printer/PC Interface Module Remote Annunciator INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as a fire alarm control unit for use with separately listed compatible initiating and indicating devices. This control unit can generate a distinctive temporal code pattern fire alarm signal as required per NFPA 72, 1999 Edition. Refer to listee's Installation instructions Manual for details. NOTE: XLF: Software options and other non-fire functions not examined. For Fire Alarm Verification Feature (delay of fire alarm), the maximum Retard/Reset/Restart shall not exceed 30 seconds. Formerly 7165-0085:172 7165-0075:158 *Rev. 06-06-05 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results arid/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: Authorized By: MARCH 15, 2006 DIANE K. AREND, Senior Deputy Program Manager Listing Expires June 30, 2007 April 23, 2001 21 S (2) FirelfferALarms www.firelite.com GENERAL Four different monitor modules are available for Fire-Lite Alarm's MS-9200 and MS-9600 intelligent fire alarm control panels to suit a variety of applications. Monitor modules are used to supervise a circuit of dry-contact input devices, such as con- ventional heat detectors and pull stations, or monitor and power a circuit of two-wire smoke detectors (MMF-302). MMF-300 (Replaces M300) - The MMF-300 Moni- tor Module is a standard-sized module (typically mounts to a 4" [101.6 mm] square box) that supervises either a Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style B) circuit of dry-contact input de- vices. MMF-301 (Replaces M301) —The MMF-301 is a Min- iature Monitor Module (a mere 1.3" (33.02 mm) H x 2.75" (69.85 mm) W x 0.5" (12.70 mm) D) used to supervise a Class B (Style B) circuit. Its compact design allows the MMF- 301 to be mounted in a single-gang box behind the device it is monitoring. MMF-302 (Replaces M302) - The MMF-302 Inter- face Module is a standard-sized module used to monitor and supervise compatible two-wire, 24 volt, smoke detectors on a Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style B) circuit. MDF-300 (New) - The MDF-300 Dual Monitor Module is a standard-sized module (typically mounts to a 4' [101.6 mm] square box) that supervises two Class B (Style B) cir- cuits of dry-contact input devices. MMF-300 MONITOR MODULE Built-in type identification automatically identifies this de- vice as a monitor module to the control panel. Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop. No additional power required. High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. Direct Decade 01 —99 (MS-9200) and 01-159 (MS-9600) entry of address. LED flashes green during normal operation and latches on steady red to indicate alarm. The MMF-300 Monitor Module is intended for use in intelli- gent, two-wire systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using the built-in rotary switches. It pro- vides either a two-wire or four-wire Class A or Class B fault- tolerant Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) for normally-open-con- tact fire alarm and supervisory devices. The module has a panel-controlled LED indicator. The MMF-300 can be used to replace M300 modules in existing systems. MMF-300 Applications - Use to monitor a zone of four-wire smoke detectors, manual fire alarm pull stations, waterf low devices, or other normally-open dry-contact alarm activation devices. May also be used to monitor normally- open supervisory devices with special supervisory indica- tion at the control panel. Monitored circuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class D) Initiating Device Circuit. A 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistor (provided) MMF-300 Series/MDF-300 Addressable Monitor Modules Section: Addressable Devices ST <i 7300-0075:185 MMF-300, MMF-302 and MDF-300 terminates the Style B circuit. No resistor is required for su- pervision of the Style D circuit. Maximum IDC resistance is 1,500 ohms. MMF-300 Operation - Each MMF-300 uses one of 99 (MS-9200) or 159 (MS-9600) available module addresses on an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and the status (open/normal/short) of its Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communication with the control panel. The LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limita- tions on the loop). MMF-300 Specifications Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum current draw: 5.1 mA (LED on). Average operating current: 400 pA (LED flashing). EOL resistance: 47K ohms. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 490C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high x 4" (101.6 mm) wide x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (101.6 mm) square x 2.125" (53.975 mm) deep box. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applica- -90 ______ tions or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without IS09001 notice. For more information, contact Fire-Lite Alarms, One Fire-Life Place, Northford, I 30 I Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627-3473, Toll Free FAX: (877) 699-410, FAX EYSINEIRINS & MNOFAC1URING Back:(888) 388-3299. Made in the U.S.A. DF-52121 - Page lof3 MMF-301 MINI MONITOR MODULE Built-in type identification automatically identifies this de- vice as a monitor module to the MS-9200. Powered directly by two-wire SLC Loop. No additional power required. High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. Tinned, stripped leads for ease of wiring. Direct-dial entry of address (01-99). The MMF-301 Mini Monitor Module can be installed in a single-gang junction directly behind the monitored unit. Its small size and light weight allow it to be installed without rigid mounting. The MMF-301 is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems where the individual address of each mod- ule is selected using rotary switches. It provides a two-wire initiating device circuit for normally-open-contact fire alarm and security devices. The MMF-301 can be used to replace M301 module in existing systems. 1415 0 1 I_ADDRESS o i I[ -' 2 11 2 LOOP 10 5 I _ 8 7 61 I 9876 TENS ONES MMF-301 Applications - Use to monitor a single de- vice or a zone of four-wire smoke detectors, manual fire alarm pull stations, waterflow devices, or other normally-open dry-contact devices. May also be used to monitor normally- open supervisory devices with special supervisory indica- tion at the control panel. Monitored circuit/device is wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) Initiating Device Circuit. A 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistor (provided) terminates the circuit. MMF-301 Operation - Each MMF-301 uses one of 159 (MS-9600 only) available module addresses on an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and the status (open/normal/short) of its Ini- tiating Device Circuit (IDC). MMF-301 Specifications Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Average operating current: 375 pA maximum EOL resistance: 47K ohms. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Dimensions: 1.3° (33.02 mm) high x 2.75" (69.85 mm) wide x 0.5° (12.70 mm) deep. Wire length: 6° (152.4 mm) minimum. Page 20f 3 - DF-52121 MMF-302 INTERFACE MODULE Supports compatible two-wire smoke detectors. Supervises IDC wiring and connection of external power source (resettable). High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. Direct-dial entry of address (01-99). LED flashes during normal operation (this is a program- mable option). LED latches steady to indicate alarm on command from control panel. The MMF-302 Interface Module is intended for use in intel- ligent, addressable systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using built-in rotary switches. This module allows intelligent panels to interface and monitor two- wire conventional smoke detectors. It transmits the status (normal, open, or alarm) of one full zone of conventional de- tectors back to the control panel. All two-wire detectors be- ing monitored must be UL compatible with the module. MMF-302 Applications - Use the MMF-302 to moni- tor a zone of two-wire smoke detectors. The monitored cir- cuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class A) Initiating Device Circuit. A 3.9 K ohm End-of-Line Resistor (provided) terminates the end of the Style B or D (class B or A) circuit (maximum IDC loop resistance is 25 ohms). Install ELR across terminals 8 and 9 for Style D ap- plication. MMF-302 Operation - Each MMF-302 uses one of 159 (MS-9600 only) available module addresses on an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and the status (open/normal/short) of its Ini- tiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communication with the control panel. The LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limitations on the loop). MMF-302 Specifications Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum current draw: 5.1 mA (LED on). Average operating current: 270 pA (LED flashing). EOL resistance: 3.9K ohms. External supply voltage (between Terminals T3 and T4): DC voltage: 18 to 28 volts power limited. Ripple voltage: 0.1 VRMS maximum. Current: 90 mA per module maximum. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 490C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high x 4" (101.6 mm) wide x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (101.6 mm) square x 2.125" (53.975 mm) deep box. MDF-300 DUAL MONITOR MODULE Built-in type identification automatically identifies this de- vice as two monitor modules to the control panel. Powered directly by the two-wire SLC loop. No additional power required. High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. Direct-dial entry of address 01 - 159 on the MS-9600. LED flashes green during normal operation and latches on steady red to indicate alarm. The MDF-300 Dual Monitor Module is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using the built-in rotary switches. It provides two independant two-wire fault-tolerant Initiating Device Circuits (IDCs) at two separate, consecutive ad- 0 PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION MMF-300 Monitor Module. MMF-301 Mini Monitor Module. MMF-302 Two-Wire Detector Monitor Module. MDF-300 Dual Monitor Module. SMB500 Optional Surface-Mount Backbox. MOUNTING DIAGRAMS for standard-sized modules dresses. It is capable of monitoring normally open-contact fire alarm and supervisory devices, or either normally open or normally closed security devices. The module has a single panel-controlled red LED indicator. MDF-300 Applications - Use to monitor a zone of four- wire smoke detectors, manual fire alarm pull stations, waterf low devices, or other normally-open dry-contact alarm activation devices. May also be used to monitor normally- open supervisory devices with special supervisory indica- tion at the control panel. Monitored circuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) Initiating Device Circuit. The 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistors (provided) terminate the Style B circuit. Maximum IDC resistance is 1,500 ohms. MDF-300 Operation - Each MDF-300 uses two of 99 (MS-9200) or 159 (MS-9600) available module addresses on an SLC loop, It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and the status (open/normal/short) of its Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communication with the control panel. The LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limita- tions on the loop). MDF-300 Specifications Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum current draw: 5.1 mA (LED on). Average operating current: 750 pA (LED flashing). EOL resistance: 47K ohms. Maximum IDC wire resistance: 1,500 Ohms. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (1114.3 mm) high x 4 (101.6 mm) wide x 1.25" (31.75 mm) deep. Mounts to a 4(101.6mm) square x 2.125 (53.975 mm) deep box. Accessories: SMB500 electrical box. INSTALLATION MMF-300, MMF-302 and MDF-300 modules mount directly to a standard 4 (101.6 mm) square, 2.125° (53.975 mm) deep, electrical box. They may also be mounted to the SMB500 surface-mount box. Mounting hardware and instal- lation instructions are provided with each module. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regu- lations. These modules are intended for power-limited wir- ing only. The MMF-301 module is intended to be wired and mounted without rigid connections inside a standard electrical box. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. ARCHITECTS'/ENGINEERS' SPECIFICATIONS Specifications of these and all Fire-Lite Alarms products are available from Fire-Lite Alarms. DF-52121 - Page 3of3 CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7300-0075:185 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Misc. Devices/Control Unit Accessories LISTEE: Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc., One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472-1653 Contact: Brian Reynolds *(203) 484-7161 FAX (203) 484-7309 DESIGN: Models MDF-300, MMF-301, MMF-300, MMF-302, MCF-300 monitor modules; Models CRF-300 and CMF-300 control modules; and MMF-302-6 six zone interface signaling device module. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: 15-32 VDC INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listees name, model designation, electrical rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as control unit accessories for use with listee's separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. *Rev. 05-06-05 JEW This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 3, 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marsha! Program Manager S July 14, 2004 DF-52384 E-160 SD35 5(A)! $D35 5T(A) (j) FireuTe iarms AddrabIe Photoelectric Smoke Detectors www.firelite.com Section: Addressable Devices GENERAL The Fire-Lite Alarms SD355 and SD355T addressable, low-profile plug-in photoelectric detectors use a state-of- the-art photoelectric sensing chamber with communica- tions to provide open area protection and are used exclu- sively with Fire-Lite's MS-9200, MS-9200UD, and MS-9600 Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs). The SD355T adds thermal sensors that will alarm at a fixed temperature of 135°F (57°C). Since these detectors are addressable, they will help emergency personnel quickly locate a fire during its early stages, potentially saving pre- cious rescue time while also reducing property damage. Two LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory (P/N RA400Z). FEATURES SL loop: Two-wire loop connection. Unit uses base for wiring, detector head plugs-in. Addressing: Addressable by device. Direct Decade 01.- 99 (MS-9200, MS-9200UD) and 01 - 159 (MS-9600) entry of address. Architecture: Unique single-source, dual-chamber design to respond quickly and dependably to a broad range of fires. Sleek, low-profile design. Integral communications and built-in type identification. Built-in tamper-resistant feature. Removable cover and insect-resistant screen for simple field cleaning. Operation: Withstands air velocities up to 1,500 feet-per-minute (7.6 m/sec.) without triggering a false alarm. Factory preset at 1.5% nominal sensitivity for panel alarm threshold level. Visible LED "blinks' when the unit is addressed (com- municating with the fire panel) and latches on in alarm. Mechanicals: Sealed against back pressure. Direct surface mounting or electrical box mounting. Mounts to: single-gang box, 3.5(8.89cm) or 4.0(10.16 cm) octagonal box, or 4.0" (10.16 cm) square electrical box (using a plaster ring - included). California State Fire Marshal 7272075:194 LISTED S1059 MEA APPROVED 6934ph1.jpg SD355 with ' B350LP base — 6935pho1'.jpg •- ,, -." SD355T with B350LP base Other system features: Fully coated circuit boards and superior RF/transient pro- tection. 94-VO plastic flammability rating. Low standby current. Options: Remote LED output connection (PIN RA400Z). APPLICATIONS Use photoelectric detectors in life-safety applications to pro- vide a broad range of fire-sensing capability, especially where smoldering fires are anticipated. Ionization detec- tors are often better than photoelectric detectors at sens- ing fast, flaming fires. Fire-Lite® Alarms is a Honeywell company. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. I b dl I For more information, contact Fire-Lite Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, Niorthford, Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627-3473, Toll-Free FAX: (877) 699-4105. QUALITY SYSTEMS DF-52384 07/14/04 - Pagel of 2 CONSTRUCTION These detectors are constructed of off-white LEXAN®. 5D355(T) plug-in low-profile smoke detectors are designed to commercial standards and offer an attractive appear- ance. LEXAN® is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of General Electric Company. INSTALLATION SD350(T) plug-in detectors use a detachable mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mount base on box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) deep. Suitable boxes include: 4.0 (10.16 cm) square box with plaster ring. 4.0" (10.16cm) octagonal box. 3.5' (8.89 cm) octagonal box. Single-gang box. NOTE: Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC loop, end-of-line resistors are not required. Winng 7-taps" or branches are permitted for Style 4 (Class B) wking only. OPERATION Each SD355(T) uses one of 99 possible addresses on the MS-9200 and MS-9200UD Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), or up to 318 (159 on each loop) on the MS-9600 SLC. It re- sponds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and status. The SD355(T) addressable photoelectric sensors unique unipolar chamber responds quickly and uniformly to a broad range of smoke conditions and can withstand wind gusts up to 1,500 feet-per-minute (7.6 rn/sec.) without sending an alarm level signal. Because of its unipolar chamber, the SD355(T) is approximately two times more responsive than most photoelectric sensors. This makes it a more stable detector. DETECTOR SENSITIVITY TEST Each detector can have their sensitivity tested (required per NFPA 72, Chapter 7 on Inspection, Testing and Main- tenance) when installed/connected to an MS-9200, MS- 9200UD, or MS-9600 addressable fire alarm control panel. The results of the sensitivity test can be printed off the MS- 9200, MS-9200U0, or MS-9600 for record keeping. SPECIFICATIONS PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION NOTE: A" suffix indicates ULC-Listed model. SD355 Addressable photoelectric detector (B350LP base included). SD355A Same as SD355 with ULC Listing (935OLPA base included). SD3551 Same as SD355 but with thermal element (B35OLP base included). SD355TA Same as SD355T with ULC Listing (B35OLPA base included). RA400Z(A) Remote LED. Mounts to a single-gang box. B35OLP(A) Plug-in detector base (included). Dimen- sions: 6.1(15.5 cm). Mounting: 4.0(10.16 cm) square box with or without plastic ring, 4.0" (10.16 cm)octagonal box, 3.5' (8.89 cm) octagonal box, or single-gang box. All mount- ing boxes have a minimum depth of 1.5" (3.81 cm). B224RB(A) Plug-in System Sensor relay detector base. Diameter: 6.2" (15.75 cm). Mounting: 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box with or without plastic ring, 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box, or 3.5" (8.89 cm) octagonal box. All mounting boxes have a minimum depth of 1.5" (3.81 cm). 13224131(A) Intelligent isolator base, isolator SLC from shorts on the loop. B50IBH(A) Plug-in System Sensor sounder detector base. Diameter: 6.0" (15.24 cm). Mounting: 4.0" (10.16 cm) square box with or without plastic ring. Mounting box has a minimum depth of 1.5" (3.81 cm). 135OIBHT(A) Same as B50IBBH(A), but includes tempo- ral sounder. Accessories: RA400Z(A) Remote LED annunciator. 3 - 32 VDC. Fits U.S. single-gang electrical box. For use with B501(A) and B35OLP(A) bases only. SMK400 Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface wiring conduit. For use with B501(A) base only. RMK400 Recessed mounting kit. For use with B501(A) base only. M02-04-01 Test magnet Voltage range: 15-32 VDC (peak). Standby current: 300 pA @ 24 VDC. LED current: 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (latched 'ON"). Air velocity: 1,500 ft/mm. (7.6 rn/sec.) maximum. Diameter: 6.1" (15.5 cm) installed in B35OLP base. Height: 2.1" (5.33 cm) installed in B35OLP base. Weight: 3.6 oz. (102 g). Operating temperature range: for SD355: 0°C to 49°C (32°F to 120°F) SD350; for SD355T: 0°C to 38°C (32°F to 100°F). Temperature: 0°C - 49°C (32°F - 120°F). Relative humidity: 10% - 93%, non-condensing. XR-2 Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/ or removal of detector heads from bases in high ceiling applications. XP-4 Extension pole for XR-2. Comes in three 5-ft. (1.524 m) sections. Page 2 of 2 - DF-52384 07114104 CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7272-0075:194 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Photoelectric Smoke Detector LISTEE: Fire-Lite Alarms Inc., One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472 Contact: Brian Reynolds *(203) 484-7161 FAX (203) 484-7309 DESIGN: Models SD350, SD350T, SD355, 8D355T and AD355 photoelectric type smoke detectors. Model SD350T and SD355T has a 135°F supplement integral heat sensor which only assists in a fire situation. The purpose of this thermal circuitry is to increase the sensitivity of the detector. This thermal circuitry is NOT approved for use as a heat detector. Refer to listees printed data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: 24VDC INSTALLATION: In accordance with listees printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances and a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listees name, model number, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as photoelectric smoke detector for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. All units are suitable for installation inside air duct with a maximum air velocity of 4000 fpm. NOTE: The photoelectric type detectors are generally more effective at detecting slow, smoldering fires which smolder for hours before bursting into flame. Sources of these fires may include cigarettes burning in couches or bedding. The ionization type detectors are generally more effective at detecting fast, flaming fires which consume combustible materials rapidly and spread quickly. Sources of these fires may include paper burning in a waste container or a grease fire in the kitchen. *Rev. 05-06-05 BH This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or . recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation V criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 3 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marshal Program Manager Model DH100ACDCLP 4-Wire Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector with Low-Flow Technology Product Overview Air velocity rating from 100 to 4000 feet per minute (0.5 to 2032 rn/sec.) Patented interconnectabillity for multi-fan shutdown (up to ten air handlers) Patented telescopic sampling tube Patented cover tamper trouble signal 24 VAC/DC or 120/240 VAC operation High-Low voltage barrier Equipped with two DPDT Form C relay contacts Built-in reset button Outside mounting tabs Easy and quick mounting to round or rectangular ducts from 1-12' (0.3-3.7 meters) wide Easy to clean UL recognized field-replaceable power and sensor boards Remote test station option Remote sounder option Transparent cover for convenient visual inspection UL 268A listed 3-year warranty LISTED The System Sensor Innovair— DH100ACDCLP is a 4-wire photoelectric air duct smoke detector capable of sensing smc.ke in air velocities from 100 to 4,000 feet per minute (0..5 to 20.32 m/sec). This Innovair features Low-Flow technology that enables duct smoke detection throughout a broad range of airflow ciriironments. Many difficult to sd -ic HVAC a?plicatiorls occur in low airflow duct applications ;where reliable smoke detection is criticak. Innovair with Lcw-Flow technology can detect smoke at air speed velocities of 100 feet per minute or greater, while continuing the same reliable performance to 4,000 feet per minute. Te twc available fcrrn C relay contacts çrovde rekable performance fcr the management of fans, blowers and air conditioning systems. These H.VAC devices can be configured to prevent the s?:ead of toxic smoke and fire gasses through a protected area The Innovair family is designed for simplified installation and easy mainte- nance. The modular construction allows for easy cleaning and uncomplicated field replacement of the UL recognized power and sensor boards. The patented cover missing feature insures the cover is securely tightened following routine cleaning arid maintenance. The patented interconnectability feature allows n:ultiple Innovairs to communicate with each other. In the even: smoke is detected, the Innovair will signal the remaining interconnected detectors to ictiate :heir relays for smoke control. WARNING: Duct smoke de:ectors have specific limitations. DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS ARE: NOT a substitute for an open area smoke detector, NOT a substitute for early warning detection, and NOT a replacemen: for a buildings regular fire detection system.. Refer to NFPA 72 and 90A for additional nformation about the proper aDplication of duct smoke cetectors. -------------- AVAILABLE POWER INPUTS t 120 VAC T I 220/240 VAC ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR FAN SHUTDOWN, ETC. 11661771881 "C2.0 'E"C. ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS SHOWN IN STANDBY. CONTACTS TRANSFER DURING ALARM AS INDICATED BY THE ARROWS. SUPERVISORY TROUBLE CONTACTS 14 3 TROUBLE CONTACTS CLOSED IN ALARM AND STANDBY. CONTACTS OPEN WHILE DETECTOR PCB OR POWER IS REMOVED OR WHEN TAMPER FEATURE TIMES OUT. OPEN CONTACTS SIGNAL TROUBLE CONDITION TO PANEL. ALARM CONTACTS SHOWN INITIATION OPEN IN STANDBY. CONTACTS CONTACTS CLOSE IN ALARM. I.. _____________ LAST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP DH1 OSACOCLP CONNECT POWER SOURCE TO APPROPRIATE TERMINALS OF EACH DETECTOR. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL POWER SUPPLY INFORMATION. FOR WIRING OF AUXILIARY DEVICES, REFER TO MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OR CONTACT MANUFACTURER. NOTE: THE SUPERVISORY RELAY NOW PROVIDES A FORM C CONTACT FOR CUSTOMIZED APPLICATIONS. FOR STANDARD APPLICATIONS, ONLY THE "NOfl CONTACT IS USED EOL RESISTOR SPECIFIED BY PANEL MANUFACTURER to Architectural/ Engineering Specifications The air duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor Model DH100ACDCLP Series Duct Smoke Detector. The detector hous- ing shall be UL listed per UL 268A specifically for use in air handling systems. The detector shall operate at air velocities of 100 feet per minute to 4000 feet per minute (0.5 to 20.32 rn/sec.). The unit shall be capable of controlling up to ten (10) air handling systems when interconnected with other detectors. The detector shall be capable of providing a trouble signal in the event that the front cover is removed. It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch or remote testing using the SSK451 Multi-Signaling Accessory or the RTS451KEY Remote Test Station. The unit shall be reset by local reset button or remote test station. The duct smoke detector housing shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber in compliance with UL 268A, Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. The housing shall be capable of mounting to either rectangular or round ducts without adapter brackets. An integral filter system shall be included to reduce dust and residue effects on detec- tor and housing, thereby reducing maintenance and servicing. Sampling tubes shall either be telescoping or be easily installed by passing through the duct housing after the housing is mounted to the duct. The unit shall provide a spacial separation of no less than 1/4" (6.4 mm) and/or a physical barrier between the high and low voltage terminals. The enclosure shall meet all applicable NEC and NFPA standards regarding electrical junction boxes. Terminal connections shall be of the strip and clamp method suitable for 12-18 AWG wiring. Wiring Guide System wiring diagram for 4-wire duct smoke detectors -------------- AVAILABLE POWER INPUTS POWER INPUTS ACCEPT I 24 VDC, 24 VAC 50.60 HZ, 9 10 A B C 120 VAC 50-60 HZ, OR 220/240 VAC 50-60 HZ. CONNECT POWER SOURCE TO APPROPRIATE TERMINALS tVACOF EACH DEFECTOR. 2201240 VAC ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS I FOR FAN SHUTDOWN, ETC. AUX. CONTACT RATINGS I 16 6 17 7 18 8 iSA 0/ 30 VDC RESISTIVE bA 0/ 250 VAC 100,,,A MINIMUM 0/ 5 VDC N. J NOT INTENDED FOR i33 IL UC CONNECTION TO CONTROL PANELS. ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS SHOWN IN STANDBY. CONTACTS TRANSFER DURING ALARM AS INDICATED BY THE ARROWS. TROUBLE CONTACT RATING SUPERVISORY TROUBLE CONTACTS 2.0 A 0/ 30 VDC reslslGe 2.0 A 0/ 125 VAC reslslIve 14 3 TROUBLE CONTACTS CLOSED IN ALARM AND STANDBY. OPEN WHILE DETECTOR POD OR POWER IS REM RED OR EN TAMPER FEATURE TIMES OUT. OPEN MEN CONTACTS SIGNALTROUBLE CONDITION TO PANEL. I ALARM I I ALARM CONTACTS SHOWN INITIATION INITIATION OPEN IN STANDBY. LOOP CONTACTS CONTACTS CLOSE IN ALARM. UL LISTED 4-WIRE FIRST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP CONTROL PANEL DH100ACDCLP Specifications Size 143A" (37 cm.) Length 51h" (14 cm.) Width 2/4" (7 cm.) Depth Shipping Weight 33/4 lbs. (1.7 kg.) Operating Temperature Range 32° to 131°F (00 to 55°C) Storage Temperature Range —220 to +158°F (-30° to +70°C) Operating Humidity Range 10% to 93% relative humidity non-condensing Air Duct Velocity 100 to 4000 ft./min. (0.5 to 20.32 rn/sec.) -Electrical Ratings — DH100ACDCLP (Includes Detector) - supply voltage: 20-29 VDC 24 VAC 50-60-Hz 120 VAC 50-60 Hz 220/240 VAC 50-60 Hz • Power Input capacitance: 270 pF max. 270 pF max. N/A N/A Reset voltage: 3.0 VDC mm. 2.0 VAC mm. 10 VAC mm. 20 VAC mm. Reset time (with RTS451): .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. Reset time (by power down): 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. Power up time: 34 sec. max. 34 sec. max. 34 sec. max. 34 sec. max. Alarm response time: 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. Sensitivity Test: See detector label See detector label See detector label See detector label Power Supply Voltage 20-29VDC 24 VAC 50-60Hz 120 VAC 5O-60Hz 1 220/240VAC50-60H7. CURRENT REQUIREMENTS (USING NO ACCESSORIES) Max. standby current 15 mA 35 mA RMS 25 mA RMS 15 mA RMS Max. alarm current 70 mA 125 mA RMS 35 mA RMS 25 mA RMS' CONTACT RATINGS Alarm initiation contacts (SPST) 2.OA 5 30 VAC/DC (0.6 power factor) Alarm auxiliary contacts (DPDT) bA 5 30 VDC 1 O S 250 VAC Note: Alarm auxiliary contacts must switch lOOmA minimum at 5VDC. Alarm auxiliary contacts shall not be connected to inititaing circuits of control panels. Use the alarm initiation contact for this purpose. Trouble contacts (SPOT) 2.OA 5 30 VDC (resistive) 2.OA 5 125 VAC (resistive) ACCESSORY CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC DEVICE STANDBY TROUBLE ALARM APA451 12.5mA Max. rn/a 30mA Max. PA450 OmA in/a 15mA Max. RA400Z OmA ri/a lOmA Max. RTS451/RTS451 KEY 12mA ri/a 7.5mA Max. SSK471 5mA Max. 9mA Max. 30mA Max. NOTE: When a unit is powered at the 120 VAC or 220/240VAC input, any combination of accessories may be used such that the given accessory loads are: 60 mA or less in the standby state; 110 mA or less in the alarm state. Wiring diagram for DH100ACDCLP to APA451: DH100ACDCLP APA451 Alarm Signal ®r 2 Alarm (Red LED) Aux. Power + Sup. N. 0. S Sup. COM Power (Green LED) Aux.Power - Common NOTE: Wiring diagram shown is for DHIOOACDCLP 4-wire duct smoke detector system equipped without a control panel. NOTE: A trouble condition is indicated when the green LED is not illuminated. Important Interconnect Notes When using the interconnect feature, all interconnected units must be powered with the same, independent supply. Polarity must be maintained throughout the interconnect wiring. Connect terminal 12 on unit 1 to terminal 12 on unit 2 and so on. Similarly, Connect terminal 1 on unit 1 to terminal 1 on unit 2 and so on. Up to 10 units may be interconnected. Wiring diagram for DH100ACDCLP to 5SK451: FIELD INSTALLED JUMPER FOR Wiring diagram for the DH100ACDCLP to RTS451/ TEMPORAL PATTERN RTS4S1KEY: SSK451 DH100ACDCLP DH100ACDCLP RTS451/RTS451 KEY Alarm Signal (Red LED) Alarm lAux.Power+ 1 KEY J only without a Sup. N. 0. — *F;S45i control panel. Sup. COM ® (Green LED) Power Aux. Power — Reset L® Test COMMON TEMPORAL SELECT ALARM SIGNAL SUPERVISORY SIGNAL RESET TEST POWER (—) POWER (+) ALARM SIGNAL h-.. SUPERVISORY i CONTACT RESET TEST AUX. POWER (—) AUX. POWER (~) FIELD INSTALLED JUMPER Wiring diagrams for optional accessories: *NOTE: For RTS451 KEY only without a Control Panel. . RTS451 does not have a terminal 6. NOTE: Wiring diagram shown is for DH100ACDCLP 4-wire duct smoke detector system equipped Without a control panel. NOTE: A trouble condition is indicated when the green LED is not illuminated. 11*1 ALARM SIGNAL Il / AUX POWER 1-) - DUCT DETECTOR PA405 (OPTIONAL) DH100ACDCLP AUDIBLE ALERT ALARM SIGNAL l) 'Pi AUX POWER I-) DUCT DETECTOR DH100ACDCLP System Sensor - India Ph: 91.124.637.1770 x.2700 Fx: 91.124.637.3118 System Sensor — Russia Ph: 70.95.937.7982 Fx: 70.95.937.7983 System Sensor - Far East Ph: 85.22.191.9003 Fx: 85.22.736.6580 System Sensor — Australia Ph: 613.54.281.142 Fx: 613.54.281.172 Ordering Information Part No. Description DH100ACDCLP 4-wire photoelectric duct detector with low-flow technology A5190 Replacement 4-wire photoelectric detector board A5064 Accessories Replacement 4-wire power board ST-1.5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 1'-2' (03-0.6 m) MOD400R Sensitivity test module ST-3 Metal sampling tube duct widths 7-4' (0.6-1.2 m) RA400Z Remote annunciator alarm LED 51-5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 4-8' (1.2-2.4 m) F36-09-11 Replacement air filters (two per package) ST-10 Metal sampling tube duct widths 8-12 (2.4-3.7 m) M02-04-00 Test magnet 180-71-00 Replacement telescoping sampling tube P48-21-00 End cap for metal sampling tubes P48-55-00 Replacement end cap for 180-71-00 S08-39-01 Photo replacement screen SSK451 Multi-Signaling accessory PA400W Mini-Alert sounder RTS451KEY Remote test station with key lock PS24LOW Mini-Alert add-on strobe RTS451 Remote test station PS12/24SLENSW Wall-mount"SMOKE" lens APA451 Remote annunciator with piezo alarm PS12/24SLENSC Ceiling-mount"SMOKE" lens Accessories System Sensor provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, including two remote test stations, and several different means of visible and audible system annunciation. As with our duct detectors, all duct smoke detector accessories are UL listed. 0 E FRUPP RA400Z Remote Annunciator (UL S2522) APA4S1 Piezo Annunciator (UL S4011) RTS4SIKEY Remote Test Station with Key (UL S2522) PA400W Mini-Alert Sounder (L S3593) shown with PS24LOW add-on strobe (PS12/24SLENSW smoke lens option available) RTS4SI Remote Test Station (UL S2522) SSK451 Multi-signaling Accessory (UL 268A) © 0ooOO0000 L 00 oo b0000 © © © 0000000000 00000000 00 0000000000 1Jtucn 0000000000 0 — o 0000 00000 0000000000 - 0000000000 — - 0000000000 0000000000 0000o0o00 © © SSK4SI Multi-Signaling Accessory (UL 268A) shown with PS24LOW add-on strobe (PS12/24SLENSW smoke lens option available) System Sensor Sales and Service System Sensor Headquarters System Sensor Canada System Sensor In China 3825 Ohio Avenue Ph: 905.812.0767 Ph: 86.29.8832.0119 St. Charles, IL 60174 Fx: 905.812.0771 Fx: 86.29.8832.5110 Ph: 800/SENSOR2 System Sensor Europe System Sensor In Singapore Fx: 630/377.6495 Ph: 44.1403.891920 Ph: 65.6273.2230 www.systemsensor.com Fx: 44.1403.891921 Fx: 65.6273.2610 0 2004 System Sensor. The company reserves the right to change product specifications without notice. A05-1044-005.1/04.#1226 CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 3240-1653:119 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Duct Smoke Detector Housing/Base LISTEE: System Sensor, Unincorporated Div of Honeywell Int'l Inc., 3825 Ohio Ave, St. Charles, IL 60174 Contact: Trish Linhart (630) 377-6580 ext. 1185 FAX (630) 377-7245 DESIGN: Duct smoke detector units, Models DH100P, DH100LP, DH100ACDCP, DH100ACDCLP, DHI OOACDCLPX, DH1 OOACDCLWP, EDH1 OOLP, EDHI OOACDCLP, DHI OOACDCI, DH200P, DH200PL, DH200RP, DH200RPL, DH400, DH400ACDC, DH400ACDCIR, DH400ACDCP5V, DH400ACDCI5V, DH400ACDCIHT, DH400REL, DH500, DH500ACDC, P270-10001 and P270-1000P. Unit consists of a housing, relay, electrical components, sampling and exhaust tubes and a listed detector head. Series DH400, *P270.1 001 and *p2701 000p are intended for use with Models 1451 DH (CSFM Listing No. 7271-1653:108) and 2451 (CSFM Listing No. 7272-1653:112) detector heads for open area protection which have been tested for duct applications. Model DH400ACDCIHT is intended for use with Model 1451 DHHT smoke detector (CSFM Listing No. 7271-1653:108) Series DH500 are intended for use with Models 1551 (CSFM Listing No. 7271-1653:105) and 2551 (CSFM Listing No. 7272-1653:106) detector heads for open areas that have been tested for duct applications. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instruction, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Model DH400ACDCIHT may be used with model DH4000E-1 (Hoffman Model A-18R126) enclosure for outdoor application. MARKING: Listee's name, model designation, air velocity rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as duct detector units when used with listee's separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Models DHIOOLP, EDH100LP, DH100ACDCLP, DH100ACDCLPX, DH100ACDCLWP, DH200PL, DH200RPL and EDH100ACDCLP are suitable for use in ducts where air velocity varies between 100 and 4000 fpm. Models P270-10001 and P270-1 000P are suitable for use in ducts where air velocity varies between 300 and 4000 fpm. Models DH100P, DHIOOACDCP, DHIOOACDCI, DH200P, DH200RP, DH400, DH400ACDC, DH400ACDCIR, DH400ACDCP5V, DH400ACDCI5V, DH400ACDCIHT, DH400REL, DH500, and DH500ACDC are suitable for use in ducts where air velocity varies between 500 and 4000 fpm. Also suitable for use as a stand-alone unit where permitted. NOTE: Formerly 3240-1209:137, 139 and 3240-1209:155 *Rev 11-14-2005 jew This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 8, 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marshal Program Manager February 15, 2001 DF-52013 E-500 FlreuTe®ALarrrls BG-1 2LX Addressable Manual Pull Station www.flrelite.com Section: Addressable Devices GENERAL The Fire•Lite BG-12LX is a state-of-the-art, dual-action (i.e., requires two motions to activate the station) pull sta- tion that includes an addressable interface (mounted in- side) for Fire-Lite's addressable MS-9200 and MS-9600 fire alarm control panels. Because the BG-12LX is ad- dressable, the control panel can display the exact loca- tion of the activated manual pull station. This leads fire service personnel quickly to the location of the alarm. FEATURES Aesthetically pleasing, highly visible, dual-action design. Meets ADA 5 lb. maximum pull force. Easily operated (dual-action). Attractive shape and textured finish. Mounts, semi-flush, to a standard single-gang (2.125' [5.3975 cm] minimum depth), double-gang, or 4' (10.16 cm) square electrical box. When the handle latches in down position, the word "ACTIVATED" appears at the top of the handle in bright yellow to clearly indicate the station has been operated. Key/lock reset; needs only a 1/4-turn to lock/unlock. Includes Braille text on station handle. Captive screw terminals wire-ready for easy connection to SLC loop (accepts up to 12 AWG/3.25 mm2 wire). Optional trim ring (BG-TR). Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. Maintenance personnel can open station (for inspection and testing) without causing an alarm condition. Built-in bicolor LED, which is visible through the handle of the station, flashes red in normal operation and latches on steady red when in alarm. CONSTRUCTION Shell, door, and handle are molded of durable LEXAN® (or polycarbonate equivalent) with a textured finish. OPERATION Pushing in, then pulling down on the handle causes it to latch in the down/activated position. Once latched, the word "ACTIVATED" (in bright yellow) appears at the top of the handle, while a portion of the handle protrudes from the bottom of the station. To reset the station, simply unlock the station with the key and pull the door open. This action resets the handle; closing the door automati- cally resets the switch. California State Fire Marshal Y L us 7150-0075:184 <i > APPROVED BG-12LX Manual stations connect with two wires to one of the con- trol panel SLC loops. Each manual station, on command from the control panel, sends data to the panel represent- ing the state of the pull station switch. Two rotary decimal switches allow address settings (01-99). PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION BG-12LX Dual-action addressable pull station. Includes key lock/reset feature. SB-10 Surface backbox. LEXAN® is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of General Electric Company. S This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific IS09001 applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change _____________ without notice. For more information, contact Fire-Lite Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, N. I I Northford, Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627-3473, Toll Free FAX: (877) 699- ENGINEERING & MANUFACTURING 4105, FAX Back:(888) 388-3299. Made in the U.S.A. DF-52013 - Page 1 of 2 INSTALLATION The BG-12LX can be semi-flush mounted into a single- gang, double-gang, or standard 4(10.16cm) square elec- trical outlet box, or surface mounted to the Model SB-10 surface backbox. If the BG-12LX is semi-flush mounted, then the optional trim ring (BG-TR) may be used. The BG- TR is usually needed for semi-flush mounting with 4° (10.16 cm) or double-gang boxes (not with single-gang boxes). ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Normal operating voltage: 24 VDC. Maximum SLC loop voltage: 28.0 VDC. Maximum SLC loop current: 230 pA. - - - I I Back of station without door. ARCHITECTURAL! ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-code, with a key- operated reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of red-colored LEXAN® (or polycarbonate equivalent) with clearly visible operating instructions pro- vided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches (25.4 mm) or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox SB-10; or semi-flush mounting on a standard single-gang, double-gang, or 4° (10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or per national/local requirements. Manual Stations shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed. Manual stations shall connect with two wires to one of the control panel SLC loops. The manual station shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. Manual stations shall provide address setting by use of rotary decimal switches. I TERMINAL CONNECTIONS 1 SLC (-) 2 SLC (+) S 0 ADDRESS 0 02. 2 LOOP A A- LED TARY DECIMAL SWITCHES Cover open to show easy access to MMX module, rotary switch, and UL label. Page 2of2 - DF-52013 CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7150-0075:184 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Boxes/Pull Stations LISTEE: Fire-Lite Alarm Inc., One Fire-Lite Place, Northford CT 06472-1653 Contact: Brian Reynolds *(203) 484-7161 FAX (203) 484-7309 DESIGN: Models BG-12, BG-12S, BG-12NC, BG-12W, BG-12LW, BG-12WP, BG-12LWP, BG-12L, BG-12LX, BG-12LA, BG-12PS, BG-I2LSP, BG-12SP, BG-12LR, BG-12LRA, BG-12LAO, BG-I2LAOB, BG-12-LO, BG-12LOB, BG-12LPS, BG-12LPSP, BG-12SL, *uT..p51 and UT- PS2 fire alarm pull boxes. The BG-12 series is a dual action pull station that has normally open switch contacts. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, model number and UL label. S APPROVAL: Listed as fire alarm pull boxes for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. Models BG-12WP, BG-12W, BG-I2LW and BG-12LWP are intended for outdoor use when installed with Model WP-10 back box. Models BG-LAOB and BG-I2LOB are intended for outdoor use when installed with Model WBB or WP-10 back box. XLF 7150-0028:199 *Rev. 05-06-05 JEW This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 3, 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marshal Program Manager July 8, 2004 DF-52301 D-025 FireuTe Alarms 24 Volt, 6 Amp Remote PowerSupp www.firelite.com Section: Power Supplies/Accessories GENERAL The FCPS-24FS6 is a compact, cost-effective, 6-amp re- mote power supply with battery charger. The FCPS-24FS6 may be connected to any 12- or 24-volt Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) or may stand alone. Primary applications include Notification Appliance (bell) Circuit (NAC) expan- sion (to support ADA requirements and NAC synchroniza- tion) or auxiliary power to support 24-volt system acces- sories. The FCPS-24FS6 provides regulated and filtered 24 VDC power to four Notification Appliance Circuits con- figured as either four Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style A, with ZNAC-4 option module). Alternately, the four outputs may be configured as all non-resettable or all resettable or two non-resettable and two resettable. The FCPS- 24FS6 also contains a battery charger capable of charg- ing up to 18 Amp Hour batteries. FEATURES UL Listed NAC Synchronization using System Sensor, Wheelock or Gentex (Commander Series) appliances. Cascadable up to 10 power supplies (four with Gentex) with strobe timing maintained. Operates as a sync follower or a sync generator (default). * See note on reverse side. Contains two, fully-isolated input/control circuits (trig- gered from FACP Notification Appliance Circuit [NAC expander mode] or jumpered permanently on [stand- alone mode]). Optional mounting kit, P/N 90286, to internally house addressable SLC control module (CRF-300 or CMF- 300) for alarm activation. Four Class B (Style Y) orfour Class A (Style Z) (with ZNAC- 4 Module) Notification Appliance Circuits. 6.0 A full load output (3.0 A maximum per circuit) in NAC expander mode (UL 864). 4.0 A continuous output in stand-alone mode (UL 1481). In stand-alone mode, output power circuits may be configured as resettable (reset line from FACP required) or non-resettable or a mix of two and two. Fully regulated and filtered power output (optimal for powering four-wire smoke detectors, annunciators and other system peripherals requiring regulated/filtered power). Power-limiting technology meets UL power-limiting re- quirements. Form-C normally-closed trouble relay. Fully supervised power supply, battery and Notification Appliance Circuits. Selectable earth fault detection. 1TJ California State UI 1> (( 5Marshte APPROVED - .4'7315-0075.206 LISTED MEA S2424 219-02-E AC trouble report selectable for immediate or 8 hour delay. Works with virtually any UL 864 fire alarm control which utilizes an industry-standard reverse-polarity notifica- tion circuit (including unfiltered and unregulated bell power). Requires input trigger voltage of 9.0 - 32 VDC. Self-contained in compact, lockable cabinet (15" [38.1 cm] H x 14.5" [36.8 cm] Wx 2.75' [7.0 cm] D). Includes integral battery charger capable of charging up to 18 AH batteries. Cabinet capable of housing 7.0 AH batteries. Battery charger may be disabled via dip switch for appli- cations requiring larger batteries. Fixed, clamp-type terminal blocks accommodate up to 12 AWG (3.1 mm2) wire. FireLite® Alarms is a Honeywell company. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product IS09001 information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all _____________________ requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. I I 4iTI For more information, contact Fire-Lite Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472. EfU1EEBlN&MANUFACTURING Phone: (800) 627-3473, Toll-Free FAX: (877) 699-4105. QUALITY SYSTEMS DF-52301 07/08/04 - Pagel of 2 STANDARDS and CODES The FCPS-24FS6 complies with the following standards: NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Sys- tems (NAC expander mode). UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Alarm Systems (stand-alone mode). SPECIFICATIONS Primary (AC) Power FCPS-24FS6: 120 VAC 60 Hz, 3.2 A maximum Wire size: minimum 14 AWG (2.0 mm2) with 600V insu- lation. Control InputCircuit Trigger Input Voltage: 9.0 to 32 VDC. Trigger Current: 2.0 mA (16 - 32 V). (per input) 1.0 mA (9-16 V). Trouble Contact Rating 5.0Aat24VDC. Auxiliary Power Output Specific Application Power - 500 mA maximum. outputCircuits +24 VDC filtered, regulated. 3.0 A maximum for any one circuit. 4.0 A maximum total continuous current for all outputs (Stand-alone mode). 6.0 A maximum total short-term current for all outputs (NAC Expander mode). Secondary Power (Battery) Charging Circuit Supports lead-acid batteries only. Float Charge Voltage: 27.6VDC. Maximum Charge Current: 1.5A. Maximum Battery Capacity: 18AH. ORDERING INFORMATION FCPS-24FS6 Remote charger power supply (120 VAC). Includes main printed circuit board, transformers, red enclosure, and installation instructions. FCPS-2456RB Replacement mother board. PN 90286 FCPS-24F Module Mounting Kit ZNAC-4 Class A (Style Z) NAC option module A77-716B 12/24 VDC end-of-line relay for monitoring 4-wire smoke detector power. BAT-1270 Battery, 12 volt, 7.0 AH (two required). APPLICATIONS Example I Expand notification appliance power an additional 6.0 amps. Use up to 4 Class B (Style '1) outputs or 4 Class A (Style Z) outputs (using the ZNAC-4). In this example, the FACP notification appliance circuits Will activate the FCPS-24FS6 when reverse polarity acti- vation occurs. Trouble conditions on the FCPS-24FS6 are sensed by the FACP through the Notification Appli- ance Circuit. Page 2 012 - OF-52301 07/08/04 Example 2 Use the FCPS-24FS6 to expand auxiliary regulated 24 volt system power up to 4 amps. Both non-resettable and resettable power options are available. Resettable outputs are created by connecting the resettable output from the FACP to one or both of the FCPS-24FS6 inputs. Example 3 Use addressable control modules to activate the FCPS- 24FS6 versus the FACP Notification Appliance Circuits. This typically allows for mounting the FCPS-24FS6 at greater distances* away from the FACP while expanding system architecture in various applications. In this example an addressable control module is used to activate the FCPS-24FS6 and an addressable monitor module is used to sense FCPS-24FS6 trouble conditions. Local auxiliary power output from the FCPS-24FS6 pro- vides power to the addressable control module. *Fire.Lites MS-9200, MS-9200UD, (198-point) or MS-9600 (636- pant) addressable FACPs have the capability of locating control and monitor modules up to 10.000 feet (3048 m) away. Sync Follower/Generator Note: In some installations, it is necessary to synchronize the flash timing of all strobes in the system for ADA compliance. Strobes accomplish this by monitoring very short timing pulses on the NAC power, which are created by a Fire Alarm Control Panel such as the Fire'Lite MS-9600. When installed at the end of a MS-9600 NAC wire run, this power supply can track (i.e. follow") the strobe synchro- nization timing pulses on the existing NAC wire run. This maintains the overall system flash timing of the addi- tional strobes attached to this power supply. When this power supply is configured (via DIP switch settings) as a "sync follower, this supply's NAC outputs track the strobe synchronization pulses present at this supply's sync input terminal. The pulses are originated from an upstream FACP or other power supply. When this power supply is configured (via DIP switch settings) as a "sync generator," this supply's sync input terminal are not used. Rather, this power supply is the originator of the strobe synchronization pulses on this power supply's NAC outputs. In "sync generator" mode, the sync type (System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex) is selectable via DIP switch settings. I ], O FireuTeAlarms Pit 51883:D ECN. 05-384 by Honeywell FCPS=24FS6 FCPS=24FS8 0 Document #51883 9114105 Revision: Li I Fire Alarm System Limitations An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warn- ing devices, and a fire alarm control panel with remote notifi- cation capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat de- tectors be located throughout a protected premise following the recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and the recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all installing dealers. A study by the Federal Emer- gency Management Agency (an agency of the United States government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are de- signed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guar- antee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind.walls, on roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a build- ing. A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire. Particles of combustion or "smoke" from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors be- cause: Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, or chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow. Smoke particles may become "cold," stratify, and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets. Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching the detector. The amount of "smoke" present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into alarm. Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ion- izing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires Because fires develop in differ- ent ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detec- tor may not provide adequate warning of a fire. Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.). While a fire alarm system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a prede- termined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire pro- tection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect property, not life. IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, com- munications, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system, crippling its ability, to report a fire. Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol or medi- cation. Please note that: Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy. Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond or comprehend the meaning of the signal. It is the property owner's responsi- bility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals. In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss. A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly. Equipment used in the system may not be technically com- patible with the control. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily disabled. For added protection against tele- phone line failure, backup radio transmission systems are rec- ommended. The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inade- quate maintenance. To keep the entire fire alarm system in excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA stan- dards. At a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance A main- tenance agreement should be arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes and should be performed by authorized profes- sional fire alarm installers only. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept. PrecaL.argePMD 01IIO/2005 0 Installation Precautions WARNING -Several different sources of power can be con- nected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equip- ment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes. To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA72 after any pro- gramming operation or change in site-specific software. Re- acceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or software func- tions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvert- ently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 de- vices, must also be tested and proper system operation veri- fied. This system meets NFPA requirements for indoor dry opera- tion at 0-49° C/32-120° F and at a relative humidity of 93 ±2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 ±2'C/90 ±3° F. However, the useful life, of the systems standby batteries and the elec- tronic components may be adversely affected by extreme .temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recom- mended that this system and all peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27° C/60-80° F. Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. Refer to manual Specifications sec- tion for maximum allowable I.R. drop from the specified de- vice voltage. Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning-induced transients. Although no system is com- pletely immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or out- side aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Services Department if any problems are antici- pated or encountered. Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or in- serting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifi- cations, verity that they will not interfere with battery, trans- former, and printed circuit board location. Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before han- dling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static-suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation by authorized personnel. FCC Warning WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can ra- diate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause in- terference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environ- ment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le present appareil numerique nemet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada. PrecauLarge.PMD 01/10/2005 Table of Contents Table of Contents SECTION 1: System Overview ................... .............................. 6 1.1: General ..........................................................................................................................................................6 1.2: Features ..................... . ....................... . ............................................................................. ....... ...................... 6 1.3: Start-up Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 7 1.4: Jumpers ............................................................................................................................. ............................ 8 1.4.1: Jumper WI - Ground Fault Detection...............................................................................................8 1.4.2: Jumpers JP2 andJP3: Coded/Noncoded Input Selection ............... ............... ............... .......................................................... 8 1.5: LED Indicators .............................................................................................................................................8 1.6: Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................9 I.T. General ............................................................................................................... .......................................... 11 SECTION2: Installation ........................................................................................................................................12 2.1: BackboxMountmg..... ........................... . .............. . ...................................................................................... 12 2.2: NAC Circuit Wiring ....................................................................................................................................14 2.2.1: Style Y (Class B)... ..................................................... . ....... ...................... .......................................... 14 2.2.2: ZNAC-4 Class A Option Module. ................. .................................................................................... 14 2.3: Addressable Module Mounting .......................................... ........................................ ................................. 15 2.4: NEC Power-limited Wiring Requirements ............. ..................................................................................... 16 SECTION3: Programming Options .....................................................................................................................17 3.1: DIP Switch Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 18 3.2: Programmable Features Description .... ......................................... .... ......................... .... ............................... 19. 3.2.1: Synchronization Type Selection ........................................................................................................ 19 3.2.1.1 Maximum Number of Strobes for Synchronization ..................................................................19 3.2.2: Synchronization Mode - Master/Slave .............................................................................................. 19 3.2.3: AC Fail Delay/Aux. Trouble Relay Function .....................................................................................20 3.2.4: Input/Output Function........................................................................................................................20 3.2.4.1 Auxiliary Power Control ...............................................................................................................21 3.2.5: charger Enable/Disable ............ ................................................................................ ........................... 21 3.2.6: Door Closers ..................... .......................................................... 21 SECTION4: Trouble Supervision ........................................................................................................................22 4.1: Supervision via FACP Notification Appliance Circuit ............................. . ................................................... 22 4.1.1: Supervision of FACP to FCPS wiring ................................................................................................ 22 4.1.2: Supervision of FCPS-24FS Faults ............................................... .......................................... ............. .22 4.1.3: Aux. Trouble Relay/AC Fail Relay ................................................................................................... 23 4.2: AC Loss Reporting Delay ............................................................................................................................23 SECTION 5: Applications ......................................................................................................................................24 5.1: Controlling Four NACs With One Input and Selective Silence ............ . ................ ... ................................... 24 5.2: Controlling Three NACs and One Door Holder With One Input .................................................. .. ............. 26 5.3: Split Temporal Mode of Operation..............................................................................................................28 5.4: Remote Supply With Resettable and Nonresettable Power ................................................................... ....... 30 5.5: Door Release Service For All Four Outputs .................................................................................................. 32 5.6: Master FACP with Slave FCPS-24FS Power Supply .................................................................................. 33 5.7: Master FCPS-24FS Power Supply Connected to FACP ....................... ............................... .......................... .34 SECTION 6: Power Supply Requirements ...........................................................................................................35 6.1: Overview .......................................................................................................................................................35 6.2: Calculating the AC Branch Circuit: ....................................................................................................................35 6.3: Calculating the System Current Draw .................................. ........................................................................... 36 6.31: Overview ....... ..................................................................................................................... ..................... 36 6.3.2: How to Calculate System Current Draw ......................................................... ................................... 36 6.4: Calculating the Battery Size ......................................................................................................................... 38 6.4.1: NFPA Battery Requirements ......................................................................... ............ .................... ...... 38 6.4.2: Selecting and Locating Batteries ............................................................... ............... . ........................ 38 FCP -24F Power S1ippies P/N. 51883:D: 9/14/05 It is imperative that the installer understand the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and be familiar with the standards set forth by the following regulatOry agencies: Underwriters Laboratories Standards NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code ii Ill WI UiT1 1T tTfll F 10] • NFPA Standards NFPA,v NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 70 National Electrical Code Underwriters Laboratories Documents L UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances UL 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired Other: NEC Article 250 Grounding NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems Applicable Local and State Building Codes Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (LA Hi) Other Fire-Lite Documents: Device Compatibility Document Document # 15384 I hiS. product his bc,i ccrtihcd to comply with t lie requircmenls in the Standard for C onirol Units and Accessories Ion Fite Alarm Systems, UI. 864,91h Edition, Operation oFihis product with products not iestcd lr UL $64, 91h Edition hits not been evaluated. Such operationrëqüres the approval of the local Aothoniw Flavingiunisdiction (AW). FCPS.24FS Power Supplies PN 1883:0 9/14/05 System Overview General SECTION 1 System Overview The FCPS-24FS6 is a 6 amp power supply and the FCPS-24FS8 is an 8 amp power supply. Each FCPS-24FS power supply is a compact, cost-effective, remote power supply and battery charger which provides ADA compatible strobe synchronization. The remote power supplies consist of a filtered 24 VDC output that can be configured to drive four Style Y (Class B) NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) The four circuits can be configured for Style Z (Class A) with the optional ZNAC-4 Class A converter module. Alternatively, the four outpUt circuits may be configured as 24 VDC resettable or nonresettable power outputs. The input circuits, which control the power supply operation, are triggered by the reverse polarity of an NAG or by a 12 VDC or 24 VDC power source. The power supplies are compatible with 12 VDC and 24 VDC control panels. 1.1 General The FCPS-24FS power supplies can be used as remotely mounted power supplies and battery chargers to power four noncoded or coded NACs. The Main FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel) NAC(s) is connected to the remote power supply input circuit(s). When the control input circuit activates due to reverse polarity of the NAC from the FACP, the power supply will activate its Notification Appliance Circuits. During the inactive or nonalarm state, the power supply supervises its NAC field wiring for short and open conditions. AC fail, battery, charger and ground fault troubles will also be monitored by the power supply. If an NAC or power supply fault is detected, the power supply Normally-Closed Trouble contact will open. If an alarm condition occurs and the NAC is activated, the supervision is disabled and the Notification Appliance Circuit is no longer supervised (except for shorts). Supervision of other power supply faults such as low battery, AC loss, ground fault and battery charger trouble will continue and may be monitored via the Trouble relay contacts. 1.2 Features Self-contained ma lockable cabinet 24 VDC remote power supply Outputs are completely power-limited Two optically-isolated input/control circuits, compatible with 12 VDC and 24 VDC control panel NACs Four output circuits: / Fully filtered power / Four 24 VDC Style Y (Class B) NACs (special application) / Optional ZNAC-4 Class A converter module for conversion to Style Z NACs / Alternatively, all four circuits may be configured as 24 VDC special application power outputs / Output circuits may be configured as resettable or nonresettable NAC Trouble LED - blinks to indicate the number of the circuit in trouble Maximum current available for anyone output circuit: 3.0 amps Maximum total continuous current available: / 4.0 amps for FCPS-24F56 /6.0 amps for FCPS-24FS8 6 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 Start-up Procedure System Overview • Maximum total short term current (one hour maximum): / 6.0 amps for FCPS-24FS6 / 8.0 amps for FCPS-24FS8 Integral supervised battery charger for lead acid batteries only Capable of charging 7.0 AH to 18.0 AH (Amp Hour) batteries Fully supervised power supply, battery and NACs Selectable Strobe Synchronization for NACs [System Sensor, Gentex (Commander II) and Wheelock] Coded signal synchronization Fixed terminal blocks for field wiring capable of accepting 12 - 22 AWG wire Selectable Ground Fault detection by jumper JPI Power supply trouble Form -C relay contacts (fail-safe) Optional delay of AC loss reporting for 2 hours Auxiliary Special Application Power Output for SLC modules (500 mA maximum) with optional reset for 4-wire smoke detectors Mounting location for optional addressable control module 1.3 Start-up Procedure Configure the power supply jumpers as described in Jumpers' on page 8 Install the power supply as described in "Installation" on page 12 Program the power supply as described in "Programming Options" on page 17 Wire the power supply circuits, referring to the options described in "Trouble Supervision" on page 22 and the application examples in "Applications" on page 24 Connect primary power source wiring while observing the following: / Make certain that the AC mains circuit breaker is off before making any wiring connections between the mains and the power supply / Make certain primary power source is 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.2 amps / Run a pair of wires (with ground conductor) from the protected premises main breaker box to TB of the power supply main circuit board / Use 14 AWG (1.6 mm O.D.) or heavier gauge wire with 600V insulation Apply power to the power supply using the following procedure: / apply AC power by turning on the AC mains circuit breaker connected to the power supply / connect a properly charged battery to connector JP4 on the power supply main circuit board FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 7 System Overview Jumpers 1.4 Jumpers CAUTION! Remove all power (AC & DC) before cutting or moving any jumper& 1.4.1 Jumper JPI - Ground Fault Detection The Ground Detection circuit monitors for zero impedance between the power supply and ground. Jumper WI is located in the top right section of the power supply circuit board. Cutting WI will disable ground fault detection by the power supply. This should only be done if ground faults are being monitored by a panel connected to the FCPS power supply. 1.4.2 Jumpers JP2 and JP3: Coded/Noncoded Input Selection Jp3 JP2 L- Jumpers JP2 and JP3 are located in the top right section of the power supply circuit board JP2 is used for Control Input Circuit #1 and 1P3 is used for Control Input Circuit #2 The position of these jumpers will depend on the type of signal being fed to the input circuits If the source voltage to the input circuit is a noncoded (steady voltage) input signal, the jumper for the corresponding input circuit should be in the default position which jumpers Jumpers the bottom two pins (as illustrated in drawing at left). Juniper positions shown for noncoded (steady) If the source voltage to the input circuit is coded (variable voltage), the jumper for the corresponding input circuit should be moved to jumper the top two pins source voltage 1.5 LED Indicators AC Power on (green) LED - indicates AC power is present Ground Fault (yellow) LED - indicates a ground fault condition (zero impedance to ground) Battery Trouble (yellow) LED - indicates low or no battery NAC Trouble (yellow) LED indicates a Notification Appliance Circuit trouble (blinks once for Circuit I trouble twice for Circuit 2-trouble, three times for Circuit 3 trouble and four tunes for Circuit 4 trouble Note that multiple circuits in trouble will cause the LED to blink the number of the circuit with the highest number) ChargerTrouble/AC Loss (yellow) LED - indicates a charger fault or loss of AC power Note: IfAC is applied to the power supply without a battery connected or if the battery voltage drops too low, both the Charger Trouble/AC Loss LED andBattery Trouble LED will turn on simultaneously, indicating a battery problem. Install afully charged battery to see if both LEDs extinguish FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 C Specifications System Overview 1.6 Specifications Refer to Figure 1.1 on page 10 for terminal locations. Primary AC Power - TB! 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.2 amps maximum Wire size: minimum #14 AWG with 600V insulation Control Input Circuits - TB4, Terminals 3 (+) & 4 (-) and 7 (+) & 8 (-) Trigger Input Voltage: 9 to 32 VDC Input Current Draw in Alarm Polarity: / 16 to 32 volts, 2.0 mA maximum per input ,49 to 16 volts, 1.0 mA maximum per input NAC/Output Circuits - T132, Terminals 1 (+) & 2 (-),3 (+) & 4 (-),5 (+) & 6 (-) and 7 (+) & 8 (-) alarm polarity Supervised, Special Application and power-limited Voltage Rating: 24 VDC filtered Current: I Maximum for any one circuit - 3.0 amps / Maximum total continuous current for all output: FCPS-24FS6 - 4.0 amps FCPS-24FS8 - 6.0 amps / Maximum total short term current (one hour maximum) for all outputs: FCPS-24F56 - 6.0 amps FCPS-24FS8 - 8.0 amps Output Circuit Types: / Four Style Y NACs (require 4.7 KQ End-of-Line Resistors) or Style Z NACs using the optional ZNAC-4 Class A converter module OR / Four resettable or nonresettable 24 VDC power outputs Refer to Fire-Lite Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices Trouble Relay Contact Rating - TBS Fail-safe Form-C relay (normally energized, transfers with loss of power) 5.0amps@24VDCor5.0amps@3OVAC Secondary Power (battery) Charging Circuit - JP4 Supervised, nonpower-limited Supports lead acid type batteries only Float Chaise Voltage: 27.6 VDC Maximum Charge Current: 1.5 A Battery fuse (F I) 15A, 30V Maximum Battery Capacity: 18.0 AH Power supply draws maximum standby current of 65 mA from batteries FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 9 C System Overview Specifications Auxiliary Special Application Power Output - TB4 Terminals 9 (+) & 10 (-) Special application power Power-limited, nônsupervised, Voltage Rating: 24 VDC Current: / 170 mA maximum with internal 7.0 Amp Hour batteries / 500 mA maximum with external 18.0 Amp Hour batteries Power-limited, Supervised, Special Application Nonpower-limited In NAC Mode To Transformer #1 NAC/Out 1 + To Transformer #2 NAC/Out 1 - _________________ Trouble Relay NAC/Out 2 + Form-C Fall-safe Supervised, NAC/Out 2- Nonsupervlsed Nonpower-ilmited NAC/Out 3 + _____________ (shown energized) Earth NAC/Out 3 Normally Open AC Neutral NAC/Out 4+ Normally Closed Fr_-r--AC Hot NAC/Out 4- I Common af. 67654311 TN FMX (D — 3 2 1 JP1 Ground Fault r I I Mo Detection (cut to disable) see Note at bottom DTh 1i2B!i] '*-ofaiepage. .IP1 jm ZNAC-4 Connector ii CodedfNoncoded Input Selection LJ 0 (o 31v r 7 0 IVA Fl .lJ -+ 1[III4" ®©©© I 1TJP' Supervised - - - / L+ Battery SW / L - Battery LEDs Programming / 18 AH, 24 VDC Charger Trouble/AC Loss (yellow) DIP Switches Fl Nonpower- NAC Trouble (yellow) (change switch Battery Fuse limited P,,t.ry Trn,thl, settings only I5A, 30V Note: Cutting GroundFaultjwnperJPl voids ULJI'TFPA Style/Class identiftcationsfor circuits unless GroundFaults are being monitored by an FACP connected to the power supply. Cutjumper JP1 only if a panel connected to the power supply is monitoring for Ground Faults or with the approval ofAHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). 10 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:13 9/14/05 Auxiliary Output Iio 500 mA Special Application Power'l.!.. I I E•IcII*I_i 0 aw4flfflfl 0 l — I 1— - Aux. Common + Aux. 24 VDC* - Control Input 2 + Control Input 2 - Out Common + Out/Trouble Contact - Control Input 1 + Control Input 1 - Sync Input 45 +Synclnput Note: Auxiliary Power Output Is power-limited but not supervised when allpawer Ground Fault (yellow) (Ac & DC) AC Power (green) removed) Figure 1.1 FCPS-24F5 Board Layout S DC Specific ication Power Control #2 FACP) Control FACP) Input Battery Charger General System Overview 1.7 General The FCPS may be used in a number of different applications. It may be used as a remotely- mounted power supply and battery charger where it can provide up to four coded or noncoded, synchronized or nonsynchronized NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits). Alternatively, output #4 can be used as a door holder circuit which will provide a steady 24 VDC output until an alarm condition or AC fail condition causes it to drop to 0 VDC following a 60 second delay. All four outputs can also provide power. Note: All NAC outputs can be converted to Style Z with ZNAC-4 int inn module AC Power Style Y NAC or. Door Holder Power Style Y NAC Style Y NAC Style Y NAC FCPS Trouble Output #4 Output #3 Output #2 Output #1 Contact Output Figure 1.2 Simplified FCPS Block Diagram One possible application for the FOPS remote power supply utilizes the NAC repeater feature. In this application, one or two NACs are connected from the main FACP to the remote power supply control input circuits. When the control input circuits are activated by the reverse polarity of the NACs, the power supply will activate its corresponding output circuits as programmed by SWI DIP switch configuration (refer to Table 3.1 on page 18). During the inactive state, the remote power supply supervises its NAC field wiring for short and open conditions. If a fault is detected, the power supply will enter a trouble condition and illuminate the NAC Trouble LED When the NACs are activated, the supervision is disabled and the circuits are no longer supervised (except for short circuit conditions) Supervision of other power supply faults such as low battery, battery charger trouble, ground fault and AC loss will continue and may be monitored via the power supply trouble relay. If an application requires that all four outputs activate at the same time, only one NAC is required . from the FACP. For this application, the NAC is connected to control input circuit #1 and SW1 DIP switch is set for this operation. FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:1) 9/14/05 11 Mounting Plate Grounding Strap Ground Stud - Backbox - Installation Backbox Mounting SECTION 2 Installation Carefully unpack the system and check for shipping damage. Select a location for the cabinet that is in a clean, thy, vibration-free area where extreme temperatures are not encountered. The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the power supply. Locate the top of the cabinet approximately five feet above the floor with the hinge mounting on the left. Determine the number of conductors required for the devices to be installed and determine the appropriate knockouts. All wiring must be in accordance with the National and/or Local codes for fire alarm systems and power supplies. 2.1 Backbox Mounting The circuit board contains static-sensitive components. Always groundyourrelf with a proper wrist strap before handling any boards so that static charges are removedfrom the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies Remove the PC board and transformers from the backbox before installing backbox. Set the board and transformers aside in a safe, clean place. Avoid static discharge which may damage static sensitive components on the board Mark and predrill holes for the top two keyhole mounting bolts Install two upper fasteners in the wall with the screw heads protruding approximately ¼" Using the upper keyholes, mount the backbox over the two screws Mark the lower two holes, remove the backbox from the wall and drill the mounting holes Mount the backbox, install the remaining fasteners and tighten all screws When the location is dry and free of construction dust, reinstall the PC board and transformers and continue with the installation- 8 IMPORTANT' Make certain to connect the supplied grounding strap between the Earth terminal on TB (AC Terminal Block) of the main circuit board and the chassis ground stud as illustrated in Figure 2.1: Earth Terminal on TB1 (AC Terminal Block) Figure 2.1 Grounding Strap 12 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 Backbox Mounting Installation S Top 2.87Y'(7.3 cm) 00 0 0 0 , Deplh=3.151" Backbox= 14.5" (7.75 cm) (36.8 cm) 0.75" 11 (1.9 CM) A L 0 ' 2.7" 9.1"(23.1 cm) (6.86cm) Ground Stud 10.625" 9 cm) Height 15.00" (26. Mounting Plate Pem Studs (38.10 cm) 0 %~ 0 / . Backbox Mounting Holes Boftom C) 01 1125"2868 cm) Figure 2.2 Backbox Mounting Dimensions S FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 13 Installation NAC Circuit Wiring 2.2 NAC Circuit Wiring 2.2.1 Style Y (Class B) The standard configuration for NACs is Style Y (Class B) as shown in Figure 23. 4.7K ELR Alan Polarity Shown [1 Horn Strobe Horn Strobe Horn Strobe TB2 ° ! ' 8 11 F i I co 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 U — FCPS-24FS Circuit Board Figure 2.3 NAC Style Y (Class B) 2.2.2 ZNAC4 Class A Option Module The ZNAC-4 is an optionalClass A conversion module which mounts to connector J3 on the upper right side of the FCPS-24FS circuit board This module allows the FCPS 24FS6 or FCPS 24FS8 to support Style Z (Class A) Notification Appliance Circuits. ZNAC-4 Option Module ZNAC-4 \\ Horn Strobes Alarm Polarity Shown TB2 aIo - 7I1? + 43 3 8 12345678910 •1 lø FCPS-21SCircuit Figure 2.4 Style Z (Class A) NACs 1sing ZNAC-4 Option Module 14 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9114/05 Addressable Module Mounting Installation 2.3 Addressable Module Mounting The FCPS-24FS has been designed to allow the mounting of an addressable control, relay, or monitor module on the main circuit board inside the power supply cabinet with the module status LED visible through the closed door. This allows power to be fed from the FCPS-24FS Auxiliary Power output directly to the module, if needed, without running the power wires outside the cabinet. As an example Figure 2.5 illustrates wiring from the Auxiliary power output terminals to a CMF-300 control module's terminals 3 (-) and 4 (+). Note that the optional module mounting kit (PIN 90286) is required to install an addressable module on the power supply main circuit board The kit includesfourfemale/female andfour malel female standoffs as well as four mounting screws. Module Installation I. Remove FCPS-24FS main circuit board from mounting plate by removing four corner screws. Install four male/female standoffs through bottom of board in holes indicated in illustration above. Screw four female/female standoffs to male ends of standoffs installed in Step 2 to secure in place. Place addressable module over standoffs installed in Step 3 and secure with supplied screws. Reinstall main circuit board on mounting plate and wire module as show in illustration above. female/female standoffs At female/female standoffs Dow- mounting screw T addressable module [Ill fl 0 Figure 2.5 Mounting Module In FCPS-24FS Cabinet FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN51883:D 9/14/05 Installation NEC Power-limited Wiring Requirements 2.4 NEC Power-limited Wiring Requirements Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet. All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25" away from any nonpower-limited circuit wiring. Furthermore, all power-limited circuit wiring and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through different conduits. One such example of this is shown below. Your specific application may require different conduit knockouts to be used Any conduit knockouts may be used. For power-limited applications, use of conduit is optional. AC Power Output Circuits Relay Contacts Nonpower-limited Power-limited Circuits Nonpower-limited Circuit Input Circuits Power-limited Circuit Specific Application Power & SLC are Power-limited Circuits Figure 2.6 Power-limited Wiring Example 16 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 [I: NEC Power-limited Wiring Requirements Programming Options SECTION 3 Programming Options This section describes the programming options available via DIP switch settings. The FCPS can be field programmed using option DIP switch SW1 which is located in the lower center of the circuit board. Refer to the following illustration for switch location and DIP switch placement in the ON and OFF positions. Important: Change DIP switch settings only when all power (AC & DC) is removed L1- I 1L fl H H I I - t 0 rM 0 ID 5315"Lf- EHI-0 M Switches I through 7 shown. in OFF (Open) position ON Switch 8 shown in ON (Closed) position Figure 3.1 Field Programming DIP Switches 0 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:1) 9/14/05 17 Programming Options DIP Switch Settings 3.1 DIP Switch Settings The following table lists the FCPS programmable features and the switch settings required to select a particular feature. A detailed description of each feature is presented in the following pages. Table 3.1 DIP Switch Settings SW! DIP Switch ON OFF 1 This switch works in conjunction with switch 2 to determine the Strobe Synchronization Type 2 1 OFF, 2 OFF= no sync (steady +24V) - default 10FF, 2 ON = System Sensor ION, 2 OFF= Gentex (Commander Series) iON, 2 ON = Wheelock 3 FCPS configured for Slave Synchronization FCPS configured for Master Synchronization - default 4 Delay AC Fail Reporting for 2 Hours - default No Delay in AC Fail Reporting Aux. Trouble Relay responds to all troubles Aux. Trouble Relay responds only to AC Fail/Brownout 5 This switch works in conjunction with switch 6 to determine Input to Output functions 6 50FF9 6 OFF = General Alarm - default FCPS configured as Master (switch 3 OFF), NAC Outputs 1 Through 42 are controlled by Control Input #1; Sync Input is ignored. FCPS configured as Slave (switch 3 ON), NAC Outputs 1 through 42 are controlled by Control Input #1; Sync Input is monitored'. Resettable or nonresettable Auxiliary Power Output is available from TB4 Terminals 9 & 10. Control Input #2 determines if reset will occur (must go from On to Off for a 6 second reset to occur). Output #4 function follows DIP switch 8 setting. 50FF, 6 ON = Split Alarm FCPS configured as Master (switch 3 OFF), NAC Outputsl & 2 are controlled by Control Input #1 and Outputs 3 & 42 are controlled by Control Input #2; Sync Input is ignored. FCPS configured as Slave' (switch 3 ON), NAC Outputs I & 2 are controlled by Control Input #1 and Outputs 3 & 42 are controlled by Control Input #2; Sync Input is monitored. Only nonresettable Amdliary Power is available from TB4 Terminals 9 & 10. Output #4 functionfollows DIP switch 8 setting. 5 ON, 6 OFF = Spilt Temporal FCPS configured as Master (switch 30FF) Control Input #1 controls NAC Outputs 1 & 2 and Control Input #2 controls Outputs 3 & 42 which will generate a Temporal code signal without sync; Sync Input is ignored. FCPS configured as Slave (switch 3 ON), Control Input #1 controls NAC Outputs 1 & 2 and Control Input #2 controls Outputs 3 & 42 which will generate a Temporal code signal without sync; Sync Input is monitored for Outputs 1 & 2. Only nonresettable Awdliary Power is available from TB4 Terminals 9 & 10. Output #4 function follows DIP switch 8 setting. SON, 6 ON = Selective Silence FCPS configured as Master (switch 3 OFF), NAC Outputs 1 through 42 are controlled by Control Input #1; Sync Input is ignored. FCPS configured as Slave (switch 3 ON), NAC Outputs 1 through 42 are controlled by Control Input #1; Sync Input is monitored3. Control Input #2 deternunes when Selective Silence for all outputs will occur' Only nonresettable Awduiaiy Power is available from TB4 Terminals 9 & 10. Output #4 function follows DIP switch 8 setting. 7 Disable Charger Enable Charger - default 8 Output Circuit #4 = Door Holder Output Circuit #4= NAC default Strobe Synchronization only works with non-coded NACs. If Door Closer function is selected (switch 8 ON), Output 4 does not function as an NAC, therefore sync input is ignored for it. If no synchronization is selected by switches 1 & 2, the Sync Input is ignored. 4 Selective Silence allows the silencing of the sounder portion of a horn/strobe combination device without turning off the strobe. 5When using Split Alarm with power supply configured for Slave Mode System Sensor can not be used (use System Sensor with Master Mode only) 18 FPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 S S Programmable Features Description Programming Options 3.2 Programmable Features Description 3.2.1 Synchronization Type Selection Synchronization is a feature that controls the activation of notification appliances in such a way that all devices will turn on and off at exactly the same time This is particularly critical when activating strobes which must be synchronized to avoid random activation and a potential hazard or confusion The FCPS can be programmed to operate with a variety of manufacturer's devices Note that strobe synchromzation works only with non coded NACs DIP switches 1 and 2 are used to select the type of synchronization as listed below: Table 3.2 Sync Type Settings DIP. Switch 1 DIP Switch 2 Synchronization Type OFF OFF no synchronization (steady 24V) OFF ON System Sensor ON OFF. Gentex (Commander Series) ON ON Wheelock 3.2.1.1 Maximum Number of Strobes for Synchronization The total current draw for each Notification Appliance Circuit cannot exceed 3.0 amps. Refer to the manufacturer's documentation supplied with the strobes to determine the maximum current draw for each strobe and ensure that the circuit maximum is not exceeded To ensure proper strobe and circuit operation, there is also a limit to the number of strobes that can be attached to each circuit. Following is a table of the strobes that have been tested with the power supply and the maximum number that can be connected to each NAC. Make sure that the NAC maximum current is not exceeded: Strobe Manufacturer FCPS-24FS6 (max. strobes) FCPS-24F58 (max. strobes) System Sensor 51 51 Wheelock 30 40 Gentex 39 39 3.2.2 Synchronization Mode - Master/Slave The FCPS power supply can be configured for Master or Slave Synchronization by setting DIP switch 3 ON for Slave or OFF for Master mode In some installations, it is necessary to synchronize the flash timing of all strobes in the system for ADA compliance Strobes accomplish this by monitoring very short timing pulses on the NAC power which are created by an FACP such as the MS 9600 When installed at the end of an MS 9600 NAC wire run, this power supply can track (that is follow) the strobe synchronization timing pulses on the existing NAC wire run.,This maintains the overall system flash timing of the additional strobes attached to this power supply. When this power supply is configured as a sync generator (Master Synchronization mode), the Sync Input terminals are not used. The power supply is the originator of the strobe synchronization pulses on its NAC outputs. In sync generator mode, the sync type [System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex (Commander II)] is selectable via DIP switches 1 and 2. When this power supply is configured as a sync follower (Slave Synchronization mode), the power supply's NAC outputs track the strobe synchronization pulses present at the supply s Sync Input terminals.-The pulses onginate from an upstream FACP or other power supply. Note that the Synchronization Te configured by DIP switches I and must be set to the same type as the signal being fed to the Sync Input circuit in the event that Selective Silence is employed Important! In Slave Mode, if the Input is active, but no signal is present on the Sync Input circuit, the power supply will turn the NACs on steady until a sync signal appears. The NACs will turn off when the Input becomes inactive. FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 19 Programming Options Programmable Features Description Also in Slave Mode, if the Input is active and the Sync Input is suddenly lost (FCPS or wiring failure), there will be a three second period in which the NAC outputs are indeterminate. After this three second period, the power supply will turn the NACs on steady until the Input becomes inactive. 3.2.3 AC Fail Delay/Aux. Trouble Relay Function The AC Fail Delay feature provides the option to delay generation of a trouble signal upon the loss of AC power. In addition, the operation of the Aux. Trouble Relay is altered. DIP switch 4 set to the ON position will delay the generation of an AC Loss/brownout trouble signal for .2 hours. In addition, the Aux. Trouble Relay will immediately respond to all trouble conditions on the power supply. DIP switch 4 set to the OFF position will allow the FCPS to generate a trouble signal immediately on the loss of AC power. In addition, the Aux. Trouble Relay will respond only to AC power fail/brownout conditions. 3.2.4 Input/Output Function DIP switches 5 and 6 are used to determine the Input Control circuits that will activate the four output circuits and the function of the output circuits. For example, to configure a General Alarm operation in which Input Control Circuit #1 activates all four output NACs, DIP switches 5 and 6 are both set to the OFF position. In this configuration, the Sync Input circuit is ignored if the power supply is set as a Master but will be monitored if the supply is set as a Slave. In addition, if the Auxiliary Power output is set as a resettable output, the circuit connected to Control Input Circuit #2 will control the auxiliary power reset function. The following table details the four possible input/output configurations: Table 3.3 InputJOutput Configurations DIP Switch 5 DIP Switch 6 Input/Output Function General Alarm FCPS configured as Master (switch 30FF), NAC Outputs 1 through 4' are controlled by Control Input #1; Sync Input, is ignored. OFF oii FCPS configured as Slave (switch 3 ON), NAC Outputs I through 42 are controlled by Control Input #1; Sync Input is monitored'. Resettable or nonresettable Auxiliary Power Output is available from TB4 Terminals 9 & 10. Control Input #2 determines if reset will occur (must go from On to Off for a 6 second reset to occur). Split Alarm FCPS configured as Master (switch 30FF), NAC Outputs F& 2 are controlled by Control Input #1 and Outputs '3 & 4' are controlled by Control Input #2; Sync Input is OFF ON ignored. FCPS configured as Slave' (switch 3 ON), NAC Outputs 1 & 2 are controlled by Control Input #1 and Outputs 3 & 4' are controlled by Control Input #2; Sync Input is monitored'. Only nonresettable Auxiliary Power is available from TB4 Terminals 9 &.10 Split Temporal FCPS configured as Master (switch 30FF), Control Input #1 controls NAC Outputs 1 & 2 and Control Input #2 controls Outputs 3 & 41 which will generate a Temporal code ON OFF signal without sync; Sync Input is ignored. FCPS configured as Slave (switch 3 ON), Control Input #1 controls NAC Outputs 1 & 2 and Control Input #2 controls Outputs 3 & 4' which will generate a Temporal code signal without sync; Sync Input is monitored for Outputs 1 & 22. Only nonresettable Auxiliary Power is available from T134 Terminals 9 & 10 Selective Silence3 FCPS configured as Master (switch 30FF), NAC Outputs 1 through 41 are controlled by ON ON Control Input #1; Sync Input is ignored. Control Input #2 determines when Selective Silence for all outputs will occur Only nonresettable Auxiliary Power is available from TB4 Terminals 9 & 10 20 FC1?S-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 S S Programmable Features Description Programming Options Table 3.3 Input/Output Configurations If Door Closer function is selected (switch 8 ON), Output 4 does not function as an NAC, therefore sync input is ignored for Output 4. If no synchronization is selected by switches 1 & 2, the Sync Input is ignored. 3 Selective Silence allows the silencing of the sounder portion of a horn/strobe combination device without turning off the strobe. 4 When using Split Alarm with power supply configured for Slave Mode, System. Sensor cannot be used (use System Sensor with Master Mode only) 3.2.4.1 Auxiliary Power Control The 24 VDC Auxiliary power from T134 Terminals 9(+) & 10(-) can be resettable or nonresettable power only when the power supply is configured for General Alarm operation. For all other configurations, the auxiliary power output is only nonresettable. In the General Alarm configuration, the Auxiliary power output can be made resettable by applying a steady signal to Control Input 2 (positive 12 to 24 VDC on TB4 Terminal 7 and common on Terminal 8). Temporarily removing the voltage or reversing the polarity will cause the Auxiliary power output to reset for 6 seconds. 3.2.5 charger Enable/Disable The FCPS-24FS battery charger can be disabled to accommodate an external battery charger. Setting DIP switch 7 to the default setting of OFF will enable the battery charger. Setting DIP switch 7 to the ON position will disable the charger. It should only be disabled if an external battery charger is being used for the FCPS-24FS. 3.2.6 Door Closers Output Circuit #4 can be configured as an NAC or door closer circuit Setting DIP switch 8 to the OFF position will configure Output Circuit #4 as an NAC. Setting DIP switch 8 to the ON position will configure ppiy Output Circuit #4 as a door closer circuit which will provide a steady 24 VDC to door holders until an alarm or AC fail condition removes the power following a 60 second delay. S FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 21 Trouble Supervision Supervision via FACP Notification Appliance Circuit SECTION 4 Trouble Supervision 4.1 Supervision via FACP Notification Appliance Circuit 4.1.1 Supervision of FACP to FCPS wiring The FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel) supervises the connection between itself and the FCPS-24FS via the control panels NAC End-of-Line Resistor (ELR). The ELR must be installed at the FCPS end of the circuit, after the last notification appliance on the circuit If no additional devices are connected from the FCPS Control Input terminals, the ELR must be connected across terminals 5 & 6 for Control Input Circuit #1 and across terminals 7 & 8 for Control Input Circuit #2. An open or short anywhere on the control panel's NAC or power supply NAC will be detected at the FACP as an NAC trouble. IMPORTANT: If additional notification appliances are connected to the Out terminals 5 & 6 of Control Input Circuit #1 or extendedfrom Control Input Circuit #2 Terminals 7&,8, the ELR must be installed after the last device on the circuit. 4.1.2 Supervision of FCPS-24FS Faults The FACP will detect FOPS powersupply faults as an open circuit condition on its NAC. An internal trouble contact is located between TB4 Terminal 3 (In+) and T134 Terminal 5 (Out+). Any of the following conditions will cause the trouble contact to open, provided the FACP Notification Appliance Circuit is not in alarm. The following trouble conditions will cause a general NAC trouble: A field wiring fault on the NAC output of the power supply , An AC fail condition at the power supply (only if SWI switch 4 is ON) A battery fail condition at the power supply A battery chaier fail on the power supply Aground fault condition on the power supply (zero impedance between power supply and ground) Any power supply trouble will break the connection between the FACP and the ELR connected to Control Input #1 provided the FACP 's NAC is not in alarm The FACP 's ELR must be placed after the last notification appliance connected to FOPS terminals 5 & 6 on T134 or, if no devices are connected to these terminals, the ELR must be connected directly across terminals 5 & 6. If trouble monitoring is required when the power supply Min alarm, the Trouble Relay at TBS can be used for this purpose. An addressable monitor module maybe used to monitor these contacts. Refer to "Aux. Trouble Relay/AC Fail Relay' on page 23 in the following section. Note: Control Input #2 (terminals 7 & 8) cannot be used to supervise the power supply for internal troubles, but an ELR is still requiredforFACP wiring supervision. 22 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 n AC Loss Reporting Delay Trouble Supervision 4.1.3 Aux. Trouble Relay/AC Fail Relay The FCPS-24FS power supply has one fail-safe Form-C aux. trouble relay located at TB5. The contacts can be monitored by an FACP input circuit or an addressable monitor module as illustrated below. The Aux. Trouble Relay responds to FCPS-24F power supply troubles depending on the setting of SWI switch 4. With SWI switch 4 set to the ON position AC Fail/brownout reporting will be delayed 2 hours and the following trouble conditions will cause the normally energized Aux Trouble Relay to change states regardless of whether the panel is in alarm or standby: / An AC fail condition at the power supply / A battery fail condition at the power supply / A battery charger fail on the power supply / A ground fault condition on the power supply (zero impedance between the power supply and ground / A field wiring fault on the NAC output of the power supply. (If the panel is in alarm only a short circuit on the NAC will be detected as a trouble) Note: the NAC Trouble LED will indicate which NAC circuit is in trouble by blinking once for Circuit 1, twice for Circuit 2, three times for Circuit 3 andfour times for Circuit 4. If more than one circuit is in trouble, the LED will blink the highest circuit number in trouble. With SWI switch 4 set to the OFF position, AC Faiiibrownout reporting will occur immediately and the Aux. Trouble Relay will change state only for AC Fail/brownout conditions. A monitor module can be used to monitor the relay for AC fail. S U SLC Monitor Module ELR ( __ H_ __ - T! Monitor Module 00 FCPS-24FS6/8 Aux. Trouble Relay 4.2 AC Loss Reporting Delay The reporting of AC loss to a central station is usually delayed in order to prevent multiple transmissions of AC loss and restoral, thus allowing AC power to stabilize. When a host FACP is programmed to delay AC loss reporting, the FCPS-24FS must be configured to delay the reporting of AC fail. This is accomplished by setting SWI DIP switch 4 to the ON position. This will prevent AC loss from being reported as a trouble condition for two hours. Changing the AC Loss Reporting setting will also affect the functioning of the Trouble Relay. Refer to "Aux. Trouble Relay/AC Fail Relay" on page 23. Note that the FCPS-24FS power supply will immediately indicate loss ofAC power by turning off the ACPower LED and turning on the Charger Trouble/ACLossLED regardless of the setting of SW1 DIP switch 4. S FCPS-24FS Power. Supplies PN51883:D 9/14/05 23 Use hated ELR (4.7K) to terminate Style Y (Class B) NAC Horn/Strobes Alarm Polarity Shown Style Y (Class B) Applications Controlling Four NACs With One Input and Selective Silence SECTION 5 Applications 5.1 Controlling Four NACs With One Input and Selective Silence In this application, the power supply has been set as a master with synchronized outputs and selective silence (see SWI switch settings in following illustration) All four FCPS-24FS output circuits which are shown as NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) can be controlled from one input such as an addressable control module as illustrated in Figure 5.1. The control module can be powered from the FCPS-24FS auxiliary 24 VDC power output (TB4, Terminals 9 & 10) and supervised by an EOL relay. An addressable relay module, programmed as an alarm output and a silenceable point, can be used as a selective silence input. The control module is shown to demonstrate the use of a remotely mounted device associated with an addressable fire alarm control panel The module could be replaced with any circuit capable of polarity reversal, such as an FACP NAC. Note: All NACs are supervised and power-limited ELR not required for Style z (class A) NAC - + / Horn/Strobes - + Alarm Polarity Shot -+ TB2 8 Iff - Style Z (Class A) / Internal Trouble ZNAC-4 —I ti on Module OutputINAC4 Output/NAC 3 4 C OutputINAC2 it pi OutputINAC1 II!: I End-of-Line Resistor siippliedwith Control Module 60 Lr 12 00 4 I £) SL CS EOL Power Supervision Relay Control Module A77-716B Relay Module (energized) FCPS-24FS 123 HI SWi Switch Settings 1 & 2 = sync (any setting but OFF/OFF) 3= OFF (maser) 4 = OFF (no AC Fail reporting delay) 5=ON 6 = ON (selective silence) 7 = OFF (charger enabled) 8 = OFF (circuit 4 NAC function) FCPS-24FS has been set for Selective Silence and Relay Module has been programmed at FACP as a silenceable point so it can perform selective silence when its Normally Open contact (7 & 9) closes in alarm, then opens when silence is invoked at the FACP. Note: the Relay Module can be mounted on the power supply inside the cabinet. This allows power wiring to remain inside the cabinet. Figure 5.1 Controlling Four Outputs With One Input 24 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/ 05 Controlling Four NACs With One Input and Selective Silence Applications Notes: The following notes apply to Figure 5.1 on page 24. When the FCPS724FS power supply is in an inactive state (control module not active), a trouble on the power supply will result in an open circuit condition on the control module output circuit (monitored by End-of-Line Resistor across TB4, Terminals 5 & 6). As an alternative, the trouble contacts at TB5 of the power supply can also be used for independent trouble monitoring. The addressable relay module must be programmed as a silenceable point at the FACP to allow selective silence of horn/strobe devices. The Normally Open contact of the relay module is connected between T134 Terminal 7 (IN2 +) and Terminal 9 (Aux. Power +). Do not loop wires under screw terminals. Break wires to maintain proper supervision. An End-of-Line Resistor must be installed between T134, Terminals 5 & 6 for control module wiring supervision (the ELR value is dependent on the module employed). Supervise the power wiring between the FPCS-24FS auxiliary 24 VDC output on TB4, Terminals 9 & 10 with an EOL relay (PIN: A77-716B). For a list of compatible devices, refer to the Device Compatibility Document. IMPORTANT! When the power supply is programmed for both Selective Silence and Slave Mode, T134 Terminal 7 (IN+) must be jumpered to Terminal 9 (AUX±) and Terminal 8 (IN-) must be jumpered to Terminal 10 (ATJX-). The FACP will control the Selective Silence feature with this configuration. If the terminals are not jumpered as indicated, the horn portion of the horn/strobes will be silenced at all times. SYNC SYNC JN+ IN- OUT+ OUT- IN2+ 1N2- AUX± AUX- TB4 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 25 /"Use listed ELR / (4.7Kc2) to / terminate StyleY (Class B) NAC Door Holder TB2 Nil 76 + Horn/Strobes A/win Polarity Shown ELR not required for Style ,Z (Class A) NAC Door Holder TB2 8Jj 6I -+1 Horn/Strobes Alarm Polarity Shown Applications Controlling Three NACs and One Door Holder With One Input 5.2 Controlling Three NACs and One Door Holder With One Input In this application, the power supply has been set as a master with synchronized outputs. All four FCPS-24FS output circuits, three NACs and one door holder, can be controlled from one input such as an addressable control module as illustrated in Figure 5.2. The control module can be powered from the FCPS-24FS auxiliary 24 VDC power output (TB4,. Terminals 9 & 10). The control module is shown to demonstrate the use of a remotely mounted device associated with an addressable fire alarm control panel. The module couldbe replaced with any circuit capable of polarity reversals such as an FACP Notification Appliance Circuit. Note: Au NA Cs we supervised andpower-limited Style Z (Class A) Style Y Door Holder Circuit 4 Internal Trouble Con I tad lLl ZNAC4 - Output/NAC 3 Option Module Output/NAC 2 FCPS-24FS 1 ___________ Output/NAC 1 Li SLC 90 iJ Control Module SW! Switch Settlnes 1 &:2 = sync (any setting but OFF/OFF) 3 =OFF (master) 4 = OFF (no AC Fail reporting delay) 5 OFF = alarm) 6= OFF 7 = OFF (charger enabled) 8 = ON (circuit 4 door holder) supplied with Control Module Figure 5.2 Controlling Three NACs and One Door Holder With One Input 26 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 Controlling Three MA Cs and One Door Holder With One Input Applications Notes: The following notes apply to Figure 5.2 on page 26 I The Output 4 door holder circuit will deactivate 60 seconds after Control Input #1 is activated or AC power is lost. When the FCPS-24FS power supply is in an inactive state (control module not active), a trouble on the power supply will result in an open circuit condition on the control module output circuit (monitored by End-of-Line Resistor across Termmals 5 & 6) As an alternative, the trouble contacts at TB5 of the power supply can also be used for independent trouble monitoring. Do not loop wires under screw terminals. Break wires to maintain proper supervision. An End-of-Line Resistor must be installed between terminals 5 & 6 for control module wiring supervision (the ELR value is dependent on the module employed). For a list of compatible devices, refer to the Device Compatibility Document. C S FCPS-24F5 Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 27 Applications Split Temporal Mode of Operation 5.3 Split Temporal Mode of Operation In this application, the power supply has been set as a master with two synchronized and two nonsynchronized outputs as determined by the Split Temporal mode feature. Control Input #1 (T134, Terminals 3 & 4) is connected to an addressable control module which will cause the synchronized power supply output circuits 1 & 2 to turn on. Control Input #2 (TB4, Terminals 7 & 8) is connected to an FACP Notification Appliance Circuit which is used to activate the power supply's temporal output circuits 3 & 4. Note: All NACs are supervised andpower-limited ELR not re~for Style Z (Cl S Bells J [ LJ TB2 4i 8IIo - i1 7 ij + Style Z (Class A) Internal Trouble Contact 8 6 NAC-4 Option Module X 4 FCPS-24FS 2 cm 51 End-of-LineResisto 101+1 I T1 3 supplied with Contro 1 2 - . b WGX# sk 9 10 j2 Module —FACP NAC __________ End-of-Line SLC Resistor [Co cO]II I NAC (steady, FACP no sync) Use listed ELR I terminate Style Y (Class B) NAC Bells TB2 Style Y (Class B) Temporal Bell Circuit 4 Temporal Bell Circuit 3 Horn/Strobe Circuit 2 Horn/Strobe Circuit 1 0 SWI Switch Settln2s 1 & 2 = sync (any setting but OFF/OFF) 3 = OFF (master) 4 = OFF (no AC Fail reporting delay) 5 = ON Split Temporal 6=OFF 7 = OFF (charger enabled) 8 = OFF (circuit 4 NAC) S Figure 5.3 Split Temporal Mode Application 28 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 [I Split Temporal Mode of Operation Applications Notes: The following notes apply to Figure 5.3 on page 28. 1 When the FCPS 24FS power supply ism' an inactive state (control module not active) a trouble on the power supply will result in an open circuit condition on the control module output circuit (monitored by End-of-Line Resistor across Terminals 5 & 6). As an alternative, the trouble contacts at TB5 of the power supply can also be used for independent trouble monitoring. Do not loop wires under screw terminals. Break wires to maintain proper supervision. An End-of-Line Resistor must be installed between terminals 5 & 6 for control module wiring supervision (the ELR value is dependent on the module employed) and across terminals 7 & 8 for FACP NAC wiring supervision (the ELR value is dependent on the NAC). For a list of compatible devices, refer to the Device Compatibility Document. FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 29 0 18 t.. —Power Output 4 [ ] 7 ç -i ___Nonresettable i- 6 0 —Power Output 3 [] 5 _Nonresettable L_J X - 3 _Resettable Power Output 2 11 - Power Output 1 - I f? —Resettable 2+-- End-of-Line Resistor supplied with Monitor Module Mc I - _' FUS-4FS -i i [i 0 0 - - - > ,, 55 + + + • + • SLC c Applications Remote Supply With Resettable and Nonresettable Power 5.4 Remote Supply With Resettable and Nonresettable Power The FCPS-24FS can be used as a remote stand-alone power supply to provide power to any devices that require filtered resettable or nonresettable power. The FCPS 24FS6 can provide up to 4 amps of continuous current and the FCPS 24FS8 can provide up to 6 amps of continuous current The power supply must be set for Split Alarm mode Output circuits I & 2 are configured as resettable power outputs by connecting the resettable power from an FACP to Control Input I Terminals 3(+) & 4<) on T134 of the FCPS-24FS. Output circuits 3 & 4 are configured as nonresettable power outputs by connecting jumpers between the auxiliary 24 VDC output on T134 to the Control Input 2 terminals on T134 [Terminals 9(+) to 7(+) and 1(-) to 8()] Note Alifour outputs can be configured as resettable or all four can be configured as nonresettable by setting the power supply for General Alarm and then connecting a resettable power source to Control Input I or a nonresettable power source such as the Aux Power output of the FCPS-24F5 to Control Input I For addressable panel applications, an addressable monitor module can be used to monitor the trouble contact of the FCPS 24F5 and the resettable power connection from the FACP using an End-of-Line power supervision relay. If the FCPS 24FS enters a trouble condition the Normally Closed trouble contact will open and if the resettable power from the FACP is lost, the Normally Closed power supervision relay contact will open 24 VDC Resettable Power FACP Supervision Relay A77-716B (energized) SW! Switch Settin2s I= OFF No Sync 2 = OFF 3= OFF (master) 4 = OFF (no AC Fail reporting delay) 5 = OFF 6 = ON Split Alarm 7= OFF (charger enabled) 8 =OFF (circuit 4 NAC) Figure 5.4 Remote Power Supply Application 30 FcPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 91i4/05 C Remote Supply With Resettable and Nonresettable Power Applications Notes: The following notes apply to Figure 5.4 on page 30. I An End-of-Line Resistor must be installed between TB5 Terminal I (trouble relay common) and the monitor module input circuit for module wiring supervision (the ELR value is dependent on the module employed). An End-of-Line power supervision relay must be connected between TB4, Terminals 5 & 6. The Normally Closed (when energized) power supervision relay contact must be in series with the End-of-Line Resistor referred to in note 1. Do not loop wires under screw temiinals. Break wires to maintain proper supervision. For a list of compatible devices, refer to the Device Compatibility Document. FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 518830 9/14/05 31 Door Holder Circuit 4 Door Holder Circuit 3 _Door Holder Circuit 2 Door Holder Circuit i End-of-Line Resistor supplied with Monitor Module SLC Q o Li MonitorModule SLC SW1 Sw1tih Settings i=OFF No Sync 2= OFF 3 =OFF (master) 4 = OFF (no AC Fail reporting delay) 5= OFF 6 = General Alarm 7 =OFF (charger enabled) S = OFF (circuit 4NAC) Applications Door Release Service ForAll Four Outputs 5.5 Door Release Service For All Four Outputs This application illustrates the use of the FCPS-24FS to power 24 VDC door holders. The power supply must be set for General Alarm A signal must be supplied from the FACP to activate the FCPS-24FS outputs. This signal should consist of a +24 VDC nonresettable source connected through the FACP Normally Closed alarm contacts. During normal (nonalarm) condition, the +24 VDC should be applied to the FCPS-24FS Control Input I This will result in the outputs of the power supply being activated which will in turn energize the door holders. When the FACP enters an alarm condition, the alarm contacts will open, removing the +24 VDC signal from the FCPS-24FS, causing the door holders to release. It is important to note that for this application, doors will close immediately on activation of an alarm condition. AC loss, however, will switch to batteries in sufficient time to prevent doors from closing. 1ri 0 FcPS24Fy II( ELi r T1Ik 1K ORMOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 • N,,resettable -24 VDC +24 VDC Alarm Relay FACP Figure 5.5 Using the FCPS-24FS with 24 VDC Door Holders Notes: The following notes apply to Figure 5.5. During a normal (nonalarm) condition, nonresettable +24 VDC should be applied to TB4, Terminal (-24 VDC is applied directly to Terminal 4 from the FACP). The Normally Closed alarm relay may consist of an actual relay in the FACP or a control module which may be mounted remotely or at the FACP. 3 A monitor module may be used to monitor the FCPS-24FS,.Trouble contacts at TB5 Any power supply trouble will cause the contacts to change states: 4 A maximum of 40 amps from the FCPS 24FS-6 and 60 amps from the FCPS 24FS8 may be drawn continuously for holding doors. For a list of compatible devices, refer to the Device Compatibility Document. An alarm condition will cause the doors to close immediately. 32 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 5i883:D 9/14/05 Master FACP with Slave FCPS-24FS Power Supply Applications 5.6 Master FACP with Slave FCPS-24FS Power Supply In this application, an FCPS-24FS power supply, configured as a Slave unit; is connected to a master FACP NAC programmed for synchronized output. The power supply should be set for synchronization which matches the FACP programming. Note: FACP supplied selective silence function output will follow panel input. Note: One Relay Module can be mounted directly to the FCPS-24FS circuit board inside the power supply cabinet. Standby Polarity Shown FACP NAC programmed for Sync NACI obes - Hom/Str + SW1 Switch Settlns 1&2= sync (any setting but OFF/OFF) 0 3 = ON (slave) Caitw 4 = OFF (no AC Fail reporting delay) • r - 2f [_] ' 5=OFF general alarm FCPS-24FS flU*lIklHl 6 = OFF 1234 73 \VI)I I LfJ _ I-ol- 7 = OFF (charger enabled) 8 = OFF (circuit 4 NAC) S Figure 5.6 Supervised Master/Slave Connections Note: The following notes apply to Figure 5.6 Refer to NFPA 72, Chapter 4-4, Visible Characteristics, Public Mode. Use only devices from the same manufacturer in each system. Relay Modules programmed as silenceable points will selectively silence the notification appliances when its Normally Open contact (7 & 9) closes. S FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 33 Applications Master FCPS-24FS Power Supply Connected to FACP 5.7 Master FCPS-24FS Power Supply Connected to FACP In this application, a master FCPS-24FS power supply, set for synchronization, is connected to an FACP NAC with nonsynchronized output. internal a Trouble 7 Standby Polarity Shown Contact FACP 2 FCPS-24FS ° F -.ini'1 IUflgflcm,yste1 NAC 1245678910 Lj 3MB, 2 51 10 with no synchronization J ELR for FACP SW! Switch Sttlnos NAC 1 NAC 1 &2=sync (any setting + but OFF/OFF) HOrn/Strobes 3= OFF (master) (no synchronization) 4 = OFF (no AC Fail reporting delay) 5= OFF general alarm 6 = OFF 7 = OFF (charger enabled) 8 = OFF (circuit 4 NAC) Figure 5j Supervised FACP to Master Connections (nonsynchronized source) Note The following notes apply to this illustration Refer to NFPA 72, Chapter 4-4, Visible Characteristics, Public Mode. Use only devices from the same manufacturer in each system. 34 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 S Overview Power Supply Requirements SECTION 6 Power Supply Requirements 6.1 Overview This section contains instructions and tables for calculating power supply currents in alarm and standby conditions. This is a four-step process, consisting of the following: 1. Calculating the total amount of AC branch circuit current required to operate the system 2 Calculating the power supply load current for non fire and tire alarm conditions and calculating the secondary (battery) load Calculating the size of batteries required to support the system if an AC power loss occurs Selecting the proper batteries for your system 6.2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit The power supply requires connection to a separate, dedicated AC branch circuit, which must be labeled E[RF ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises. No other non-fire alarm equipment may be powered from the fire alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously, without any disconnect devices, from the power source to the power supply. Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Codes as well as local codes. Use 14 AWG (2.00 mm2) wire with 600 volt insulation for this branch circuit. Use Table 6.1 to determine the total amount of current, in AC amperes, that must be supplied to the system Table 6.1 120 VAC Branch Circuit Requirements Device Type Number of Current Draw Devices (AC amps) Total Current per Device FCPS-24S 1 X 3.2 = 3.2 X [ = X [ J = Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required = • FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 518830 9/14/05 35 Power Supply Requirements Calculating the System Current Draw 6.3 Calculating the System Current Draw 6.3.1 Overview The power supply must be able to power all internal and external devices continuously during the non-fire alarm condition. To calculate the non-fire alarm load on the power supply when primary power is applied use Calculation Column 1 in Table 6.3 on page 37 The power supply must support a larger load current during a fire alarm condition To calculate the fire alarm load on the power supply, use Calculation Column 2 in Table 6.3 on page 37. The secondary power source (batteries) must be able to power the system during a primary power loss. To calculate the non-fire alarm load on the secondary power source, use Calculation Column 3 in Table 6.3 on page 37. When calculating current draw and the battery size, note the following: Primary refers to the main power source for the power supply Secondary refers to the power supply's backup batteries All currents are given in amperes (A). Table 6.2 shows how to convert milliamperes and microamperes to full amperes Table 6.2 Converting to Full Amperes To convert... Multiply Example Milliamperes (mA)to mAx 0.001 3 mA xO.001 - 0.003 A amperes (A) Microamperes (mA) to pA x 0.000001 300 pA x 0.000001 = 0.0003 A amperes (A) 6.3.2 How to Calculate System Current Draw Use Table 6.3 on page 37 to calculate current draws as follows: Enter the quantity of devices in all three columns Enter the current draw wheie required. Refer to the Fire-Lite Device Compatibility Document for compatible devices and their current draw Calculate the current draws for each in all columns Sum the total current for each column Copy the totals from Column 2 and Column 3 to Table 6.3 on page 37 Following are the types of current that can be entered into Table 6.3 on page 37 / Calculation Column 1 - The primary supply current load that the power supply must support during a non-fire alarm condition, with AC power applied / Calculation Column 2 - The primary supply current load the power supply must support during a fire alarm condition, with AC power applied / Calculation Column 3- The standby current drawn from the batteries in a non-fire alarm condition during a loss of AC power 36 FCPS.24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 Calculating the System Current Draw Power Supply Requirements Table 6.3 contains three columns for calculating current draws. For each column, calculate the current and enter the total (in amperes) in the bottom row. When finished, copy the totals from Calculation Column 2 and Calculation Column 3 to Table 6.4 on page 38. Table 6.3 System Current Draw Calculations Device Type Calculate Column 1 Calculate Column 2 Calculation Column 3 Primary, Non-Fire Alarm Current Primary, Fire Alarm Current Secondary, Non-Fire Alarm Current (amps) (amps) (amps) Qty X (current draw) = Total Qty X (current draw) = Total Qty X (current draw) = Total Main Circuit Board 1 X 1 0.091) = 1 X [0.145) = 1 X [0.065] Power Supervision 1 ] X 1 0.0251 = [ ] X [0.025 1 = [ ) x [0.025] = Relay NAC/Output#1 [ ] X[ 1= NACfOulput#2 [ ] X[ ]= NAC/Output#3 1 1 X[ 1= NAC/Output#4 I ) X[ ]= Current Draw from 1 1 1 1 1 1 Th4 Terminals 9 & 10 Sum each column Primary Non-Alarm = Primary Alarm = Secondary Alarm = for totals 0 0 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN51883:D 9/14/05 37 Power Supply Requirements Calculating the Battery Size 6.4 Calculating the Battery Size Use Table 6.4 to calculate the total Standby and Alarm load in ampere hours (AH). This total load determines the battery size (in AR) required to support the power supply under the loss of AC power. Complete Table 6.4 as follows: Enter the totals from Table 6.3 on page 37, Calculation Columns 2 and 3 where shown Enter the NFPA Standby and Alarm times. Refer to "NFPA Battery Requirements" Calculate the ampere hours for Standby and Alarm, then sum the Standby and Alarm ampere hours Multiply the sum by the derating factor of 1.2 to calculate the proper battery size (in AR) Write the ampere hour requirements on the Protected Premises label located inside the cabinet door Table 6.4 Total Secondary Power Requirements at 24 VDC Secondary Standby Load Required Standby Time (total from Table 6.3 (24 or 60 hours) Calculation Column 3) I X[ I AR Primary Alarm Load Required Alarm Time (total from Table 6.3 (for 5 mm., enter 0.084, Calculation Column 2) for 10 min., enter 0.168) I X[ = AH Sum of Standby and Alarm Ampere Hours = AR Multiply by the Derating Factor X 1.2 Battery Size, Total Ampere Hours Required = AR 6.4.1 NFPA Battery Requirements NFPA 72 Local and Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm NFPA 72 Central, Auxiliary and Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems require 60 hours of standby followed by 5 minutes in alarm Batteries installed in a system powered by a generator need to provide at least 4 hours of standby power 6.4.2 Selecting and Locating Batteries Select batteries that meet or exceed the total ampere hours calculated in Table 6.4. The power supply can charge batteries in the 7 AR to 18 AR range. The power supply cabinet is capable of housing batteries up to 7 AR. Batteries larger than 7 AR require the BB-1 7F or other UL listed external battery cabinet. 38 FCPS-24FS Power Supplies PN 51883:D 9/14/05 S Limited Warranty The manufacturer warrants products manufactured by it to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for eighteen (18) months from the date of manufacture, under normal use and service. Products are date stamped at time of manufacture. The sole and exclusive obligation of the manufacturer is to repair or replace, at its option, free of charge for parts and labor, any part that is defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. All returns for credit are subject to inspection and testing at the factory before actual determination is made to allow credit. The manufacturer does not warrant products not manufactured by it, but assigns to the purchaser any warranty extended by the manufacturer of such products. This warranty is void if the product is altered or repaired by anyone other than the manufacturer or as expressly authorized by the manufacturer in writing, or is serviced by anyone other than the manufacturer or its authorized distributors. This warranty is also void if there is a failure to maintain the products and systems in which they operate in a proper and workable manner. In case of defect, secure a Return Material Authorization form from our Return Authorization Department. S This writing constitutes the only warranty made by the manufacturer, with respect to its products. The manufacturer, does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise, or that its products will in all cases provide the protection for which they are installed or intended Buyer acknowledges that the manufacturer, is not an insurer and assumes no risk for loss or damages or the cost of any inconvenience, transportation damage, misuse, abuse, accident or similar incident. THE MANUFACTURER GIVES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTENDS BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE MANUFACTURER BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY, DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE THE MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS. FURTHERMORE, THE MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USE OF ITS PRODUCTS. This warranty replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by the manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized. Warn-GL-04-2005-fm 0 (j Fl reu.re® Alarms by Honeywell World Headquarters One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 0-54 72-1653 USA 203-484.7161 Fax 203-484-7118 www. fir1ite.com 32005 byHoneweII International Inc All rights reserved. U autnon:ec use of document is stnctlyprohibitec n UUMMIMMUFACTUM ISO 9001 IUAU1Y SYSTEMS CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7315-0075:206 Page 1 of I CATEGORY: Power Units LISTEE: Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc., One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472-1653 Contact: Brian Reynolds *(203) 484-7161 FAX (203) 484-7309 DESIGN: Models FCPS-24FS6 and FCPS-24FS8 are power limited power supply/battery chargers used for supervision and expanded power driving capability of up to four Notification Appliance Circuits (FACP Fire Circuits, Signaling Devices) or resettable/non resettable outputs. Model ZNAC-4 Class A converter. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: 120 VAC, 24 VDC INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, product designation, electrical rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as a Power Supply/Battery Charger for use with separately listed compatible fire alarm control units. *Rev. 05-06-05JEW This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. 0 Date Issued: JUNE 3, 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marshal Program Manager CHARGE RETENTION (shelf life) at 687 (20C): 1 month 97% 3 months 91% 6 months 85% LIFE EXPECTANCY: STANDBY USE 3 to 5 years CYCLE USE (approx.): 100% depth of discharge 250 cycles 50% depth of discharge 550 cycles 30% depth of discharge 1200 cycles SEALED CONSTRUCTION: Can be operated in any position without leakage. STANDARD TERMINAL: Quick Disconnect .187 or Optional .250 HOUSING MATERIAL: ABS Resin OPTIONAL: Container and cover made from Flame Retardant ABS (LJL94.VO/L.01>28%) NOMINAL VOLTAGE: 12V NOMINAL CAPACITY: 20 hr. rate of 0.35A to 10.5V 7.0Ah 10 hr. rate of 0.65A to 10.5V 6.5Ah 15 hr. rate of 1.19Ato 10.2V 5.95Ah 1 hr. rate of 4.20A to 9.60V 4.2Ah S WEIGHT (approx.): 6.17 pounds (2.64 kgs.) ENERGY DENSITY (20 hr. rate): 1.49 WH/cubic inch (91.0 WH/liter) SPECIFIC ENERGY (20 hr. rate): 13.6 WH/pound (30 WH/kg) INTERNAL RESISTANCE OF CHARGED BATTERY: 30 milliohms (approx.) MAXIMUM DISCHARGE CURRENT WITH STANDARD TERMINALS: 40 amperes MAXIMUM SHORT-DURATION DISCHARGE CURRENT: 210 amperes OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: CHARGE 5°F to 122°F (.15°C to 50°C) DISCHARGE 4°F to 140°F (.20°C to 60°C) Power7Full Solutions • s_JU xtjbs 111111 _______ NP NP7-12 NP7-12FR Sealed Rechargeable Lead-Acid Battery 12V, 7.OAh Terminal .185 ± M 60 20 INCH =MM .250 _ 6.35 .185 4.70 .124 k- 3.15 .031 ± 04 .098 2.49 .060 1.52 .031 0.79 .020 0.51 .004 0.10 Dimensions DIMENSIONS: MM (INCHES) L1RECOGNIZED BY UL, File No. MH 16464 Publication No: US-NP?- 12-01 • November 2002 DISCHARGE CHARACTERISTIC CURVES AT 25'C (77-F) 6V 4V .- iuiiiiw :.,,'' rniiiiiiiu .uiIIII1IIIIIuI uiiuuu•uii•u 9mcharge Tim SELF DISCHARGE CHARACTERISTICS 100 C-, 75 40'C (1041) '3 z 50 30C(06F) 25 I 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 STORAGE TIME (MONTHS) CYCLE SERVICE LIFE IN RELATION TO DEPTH OF DISCHARGE TESTING CONDITIONS: DISCHARGE CURRENT: 0.17C AMP. (F.V. l.1WCELL) CHARGING CURRENT. E.OGC AMP. - CHARGING VOLUME 125% OF DISCHARGED CAPACITY (AH%) AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 20C TO 25C (SOY TO hF) 125 100 C-) C GE i s 60 40 20 200 400 600 000 1000 1200 1400 NUMBER OF CYCLES TEMPERATURE EFFECTS IN RELATION TO BATTERY CAPACITY 120 180 80 6O 0 4O z 20 -20 —10 0 10 20 30 40 50 ICI —24 14 32 50 VA 86 104 122 (oF) TGmperalure OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE VS REMAINING CAPACITY (V) AT 25C (7FF) 14.0 I 11.0 12.1 lET 21 40 HO 81 100 REMAINING CAPACITY (%) FLOAT SERVICE LIFE TESTING coNomoNs: FLOATING VOLTAGE 2.25 TO 2.3011/CALL AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 20C TO 221C (64'F TO 721F) 0 C, C3 a. LIFE (YEARS) 01 ROOM M M NEW Or- - hi - - -.5 fl When the battery will be used by current in excess of 3C, consult with EnerSys, Inc. prior to use. CHARGING METHODS (At 20°C) Cycle use: Maximum charging current 1.75A Charging voltage 14.4 to 15.OV CAUTION -Avoid short circuit Standby use: Float charging voltage 13.50 to 13.80V .00 not charge in a sealed container. - -- EnerSys Inc. EnerSys EMEA 8 HO. Box 14145 Brussels, Belgium Heading, PA 19612-4145 Tel:+32 (0)22479447 USA EnerSys Asia TeI:+ 1-610-208-1991 Guandong, China +1-800-538-3627 Tel.-+86 755 2689 3639 www.enersysinc.com Represented by: 00 COOPER Wheelock Series RSS and RSSP Strobes and Strobe Plates FiRE FRE Series RSS Series RSS Series RSSWP RSS Round EI Description The Wheelock patented Series RSS Strobe Appliances and Series RSSP Strobe Plates have lower current draw while maintaining outstanding performance, reliability and cost effectiveness. These versatile appliances will satisfy virtually all requirements for indoor, wall or ceiling mount applications. Strobe options for wall mount models include 1575 or the Wheelock Patented MCW multi-candela strobe with field selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/110cd or the high intensity MCWH strobe with field selectable 135/185cd. Ceiling,mount models include the patented MCC multi-candela ceiling strobe with field selectable intensities of 15/30/75195cd or the high intensity MCCH strobe with field selectable 115/177cd. All models may be synchronized using the Wheelock SM, DSM Sync Modules or the PS-24-8MC Power Supplies with the Wheelock Patented Sync Protocol. Synchronized strobes can eliminate possible restrictions on the number of strobes in the field of view. Wheelock's synchronized strobes offer an easy way to comply with ADA recommendations concerning photosensitive epilepsy as well as meeting the requirements of NFPA 72. The Wheelock Series RSS Strobes employ a Patented Integral Strobe Mounting Plate that can be mounted to a single gang, double gang, 4" square, 100mm European backboxes or the SHBB surface backbox. If the flush backbox has side or top space between it and the finished wall, the NATP (Notification Appliance Trimplate) may be used. It provides an additional .65" of trim for the Appliance. An attractive cover plate is provided for a clean, finished appearance on all models. The Series RSSP Multi-Candela Strobe Plates are a cost effective way to retrofit required wall strobe appliances to bells, horns, chimes, multitones or speakers and easily mounts to standard 4" backboxes or for surface mount use with the Wheelock SBL2 surface backbox. ® =_-,iq 14 < @ > MEA APPROVED S5391 151-92-E 7125-0785:141 7300-0785:154 Features Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, New York City (MEA), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), Factory Mutual (FM), and Chicago (BFP) See approvals by model in Specifications and Ordering Information ADA/NFPNUFC/ANSI compliant. Meets OSHA 29, Part 1910.165 Wall mount Multi-Candela models are available with Field Selectable Candela Settings of 15/30/ 75/110cd or 135/185cd. Single Candela models are available in 1575cd Ceiling mount Multi-Candela models are available with field selectable candela settings of 15/30/75/95cd or 115/177cd. (Round or Square) Strobes produce I flash per second over the regulated voltage range 12 and 24 VDC models with wide UL "Regulated Voltage" us- ing filtered (DC) or unfiltered VRMS input voltage Synchronize using the Wheelock sync modules or power sup- plies with built-in sync protocol Fast installation with IN/OUT screw terminals using #12 to #18 AWG wire For Weatherproof Series RSS See Datatsheet S9004 SERIES RSSIRSSP APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED WITH DSM MODULE SINGLE CLASS "A" NAC CIRCUIT DSM STROBE NAC SYNC CIRCUIT 0+oisr 1 ø,ii RSS RSS RSS FACP MINUS I 0+ 0 AUDIBL MINUS 2 0 * IN 2 RSS RSS RSS ROBE NAC W.OUT 2 CIRCUIT RETURN C NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are identified by the symbol A. All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. A WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERWHEELOCK.COM OR CONTACT COOPER WHEELOCK FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATiON, INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS. General Notes: Strobes are designed to flash at 1 flash per second minimum over their "Regulated Voltage Range". Note that NFPA-72 specifies a flash rate of 1 to 2 flashes per second and ADA Guidelines specify a flash rate of 1 t 3 flashes per second. All candela ratings represent minimum effective Strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971. Series NS Strobe products are listed under UL Standard 1971 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) and maximum humidity of 93% (± 2%). Series NI-I horns are listed under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances (Indoor use only). "Regulated Voltage Range" is the newest terminology used by UL to identity the voltage range. Prior to this change UL used the terminology "Listed Voltage Range". Table 1: Average RMS Current* RSS/RSSP - Wall Mount RSS - Ceiling Mount 241575W 24MCW 24MCWH 24MCC 24MCCH RSS/RSSP Models 1575cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 110cd 135cd 185cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 95cd 11 5c 177cd 24vdc 0.060 0.041 0.063 0.109 0.140 0.195 0.270 0.045 0.070 0.119 0.159 0.195 0.270 UL max* 0.090 0.060 0.092 0.165 0.220 0.300 0.420 0.065 0.105 0.189 0.249 0.300 0.420 RSS/RSSP * RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current 24VDC Wall Mountrating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v 121575W Models for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum _____ listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, 12 vdc 0.152 see installation instructions. UL max* 0.255 Table 2: AudibleslSpeakers for RSSP Strobe Plate Product Series Multitone Appliances AMT, MT Horns AH, NH, HS Motor Bells MB-G6/G10 Speakers ET-1010/1080, E70, ET70 Chimes CH70 Wiring Diagrams SERIES RSS!RSSP APPLIANCE FROM TO NEXT APPLIANCE, SYNC OR EOLR MODULE, POWER PRECEDING APPLIANCE SUPPLY OR FACP STROBE/PLATE ASSEMBLY AUDIBLE & VISIBLE APPLIANCE OPERATE IN UNISON TO NEXT FROM ____ APPLIANCE PRECEDING t I- i OR EOLR APPLIANCE, SYNC MODULE, POWER SUPPLY OR FACP +- 0 +- STROBE AUDIBLE STROBE/PLATE ASSEMBLY AUDIBLE & VISIBLE APPLIANCE OPERATE INDEPENDENTLY FROM PRECEDING + + TO NEXT APPLIANCE OR APPLIANCE - FACP - OR EOLR FROM + --]--- + TO NEXT PRECEDING STROBE OR STROBE. SYNC - - - Tj i r — - EOLR - MODULE. POWER SUPPLY OR FACP • I I I I STROBE APPLIANCE # For detail using SM or DSM Sync Module refer to Data Sheet S3000 or Installation Instructions P83123 for SM and P83177 for DSM. For wiring information on the power supplies refer to Installation Instructions P84515 for PS- 12/24-8CP and P84333 for PS-12/24-8MP. Specifications and Ordering Information SERIES RSSIRSSP APPLIANCE SYNCHRONIZED WITH SM MODULE SINGLE CLASS "B" NAC CIRCUIT SM F 0 + STROBE 0 - STROBE Strobe A NAC C Circuit (7..._.>+AudIb1 P Ø3EOLR - Audibli. SERIES RSS/RSSP APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED WITH PS-12/24-8CP or PS-12124-8MP Series PS-12/24-8MP AS RSS OUTPUTS EOLR F 1-4 4-CLASS A OR AS RSS C 2-CLASS P AS RS Series PS-12/24-8M C Model Order Code Wall Mount Ceiling Mount Non- Sync Strobe Candela 24 VDC 12 VOC Color RED Color WHITE Mounting Options— Square or Round Agency Approvals — UL MEA CSFM FM BFP RSS-24MCW-FR 940 X - X 15/30/75/110 X - X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,NO,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-24MCW-FW 9401 X - X 15/30/75/110 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-241575W-FR 7471 X - X 15(75onAxis) X - X - B,D,E,F,G,F-I,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-241575W-FW 7788 X - X 15(75onAxis) X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-121575W-FR 7476 X - X 15 (75 on Axis) - X X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-121575W-FW 7468 X - X 15(75onAxis) - X - X B,D,E,F,G,H,JN,O,R,X Square X X X X X RSS-24MCC-FW 31581 X X 15/30/75/95 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X * RSS-24MCC-FR 3157 - X X 15/30/75/95 X - X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X * RSS-24MCCR-FW 3160 - X X 15/30/75/95 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,OR,X Round X X X X * RSS-24MCCH-FW 3461 - X X 115/177 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X * RSS-24MCCHR-FW 3463 - X X 115/177 X - - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Round X X X X * RSS-24MCWH-FR 3465 X X 135/185 X — X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X * RSS-24MCWH-FW 3464 X X 135/185 X X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X Square X X X X * RSSWP2475WFR** 9013 X - X 180@ 77-F X X X - B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,O,R,X X 180@ Square X X X * RSSWP-2475W-FW 3034 X - X 77-F X X - X B,D,E,F,G,H,J,N,OR,X Square X X X X * RSSP-121575W-FR 7798 X - X 15 (75 on Axis) - X X - D,E,Z Square X X X X X RSSP-24MCW-FR 9402 X - X 15/30/75/110 X - X - D,E,Z Square X X X X X RSSP-241575W-FR 7793 X - X 15 (75 on Axis) - - X - D,E,Z Square X X X X X *PENDING All models sync with Wheelock SM, DSM or PS-12/24--8CP or PS-12/24-8MP. # Models are available in either Red or White. Call Customer Service for Order Code & Delivery. **For Weatherproof Series RSS Strobe specifications see data sheet S9004. ***Refer to data sheet S7000 for mounting options. Arcnitects and The visual notification appliances shall be Wheelock Series RSS Strobe Appliances or approved equals. The Series RSS shall meet and be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing-Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection Service. The strobe shall be listed for indoor use and shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 Class B. The strobe appliances shall produce a flash rate of one (I) flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexane lens. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). When Strobe Plates are to be installed, they shall be the Wheelock Series RSSP Strobe Plate and shall have the same electronic circuitry as the Wheelock Series RSS. The Series RSS Strobe shall be of low current design. Where Multi-Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have field selectable settings and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 at 15/30175/110cd or 135/185cd for wall mount and 15/30175/95cd or 115/177cd for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting the candela shall be tamper resistant. The 1575 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with 75 candela on axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance). When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Wheelock's SM, DSM Sync Modules or the Wheelock PS-24- 8MC Power Supplies with built-in Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash rate. The strobes shall be designed for indoor surface of flush mounting. The Series RSS Strobe Appliances shall incorporate a Patented, Integral Strobe Mounting Plate that shall allow mounting to single- gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 100mm European type backboxes, or the SHBB Surface Backbox. If required, an NATP (Notification Appliance Trimplate) shall be provided. An attaching cover plate shall be provided to give the Appliance and attractive appearance. The Appliance shall not have any mounting holes or screw heads visible when the installation is completed. The Series RSSP Multi-Candela or single candela Strobe Plate shall mount to either a standard 4 inch square backbox for flush mounting, or the Wheelock SBL2 backbox for surface mounting. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible. NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance with Wheelock, Inc. standard terms and conditions. 00 COOPER Wheelock 273 Branchport Avenue Long Branch, NJ 07740 Phone: (800) 631-2148 Fax: (732) 222-2588 www.cooperwheelock.com WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION 3 YEAR WARRANTY Made in USA El S0410 RSS/RSSP 11106 S CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7125-0785:141 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Fire Alarm Devices for the Hearing Impaired LISTEE: Wheelock Inc., 273 Branchport Ave., Long Branch NJ 07740 Contact: Luy Nguyen (732) 433-6005 Fax (732) 222-5607 DESIGN: Synchronized or non-synchronized Strobe Lights. Models are as follows: RSS-##W RSSP-##W RSS-##C RSSP-##C RSS-##CR RSSP-##CR 2415 2415 2415 2415 2415 2415 2475 2475 2430 2430 2430 2430 241575 241575 2475 2475 2475 2475 2430 2430 *2495 *2495 *2495 *2495 24110 24110 1215 1215 121575 121575 Also, Models RSS-24MCW and RSSP-24MCW, RSS-24MCC, RSS-24MCCR, RSSP- 24MCC, RSS-24MCWH, RSS-24MCWHR, RSSP-24MCWH, RSS-24MCCH, RSS- 24MCCHR, RSSP-24MCCH, *ZRS..MCC *ZRS..MCW *ZRS.MCCH and *ZRS.MC\P/lJ.J Model numbers may be followed by any two alpha/numeric character indicating lens orientation, lettering and color. Refer to listee's data sheet for additional detailed product description and operational considerations. S RATING: Electrical 12 = 8-17.5VDC/FWR OR 24 = 16-33VDC/FWR Candela 15=5cd, 1575=15175cd on axis, 30=30cd, 75=75cd, 110=110cd (Wall) RSS-24MCW, RSSP-24MCW, *ZRS..MCW: Selectable 15cd, 30cd, 75cd or ll0cd RSS-24MCC, RSS-24MCCR, RSSP-24MCC, *ZRS..MCC: Selectable 15cd, 30cd, 75cd and 95cd RSS-24MCWH, RSS-24MCWHR, RSSP-24MCWH, *ZRSMCWH: Selectable 135cd, 185cd RSS-24MCCH, RSS-24MCCHR, RSSP-24MCCH, *ZRS.MCCH: Selectable 115cd, 177cd Flash rate 60 flashes/minute INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Models with suffix -W, wall mount only. Models with suffix -C, ceiling mount only. All models are for indoor use only. MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as strobe light suitable for the hearing impaired when used with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. For synchronization strobes, Models SM- 12/24, SMX-12/24, DSM-12/24 or DSMX-12/24 Sync Control Module (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0785:132) must be used. Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. *Rev. 12-13-2006 jw This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. 5 Date Issued: JUNE 4, 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marshal Program Manager C 000 COOPER Wheelock Series AS Audible Strobe Appliances and Series AH Auddibles C Description The Wheelock patented 2-wire Series AS Audible Strobe Appliances and SeriesAH Audibles offer more foatures with low current draw. Strobe options for wall mount models include 1 575cd or the Wheelock patented MCW multi-candela wall strobes with field selectable candela settings of 15130!75/110cd, or the high intensity MCNH strobe with field selectable 135/185cd. Ceiling mount models incorporate Wheelock's patented MCC multi-candela ceiling strobe with field selectable intensities of 15130175195cd or-the high intensity MCCH strobe with field selectable 1151177cd. The audible provides a selectable choice of either a continuous horn or temporal pattern (Code 3) when constant voltage from a Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) is applied. Each tone has 3 dBA settings to choose from. When used with the Wheelock Series SM or DSM Sync Module or Wheelock PS-24-8MC Power Supplies with Patented Sync Protocol, synchronization of the continuous horn tone provides the temporal (code 3) tone (mandated by NFPA 72) simultaneously for all audible appliances. This ensures a distinct temporal (code 3) pattern when 2 or more audibles are within hearing distance. If not synchronized the temporal sound could overlap and not be distinctive. At the same time the strobes will be synchronized. This provides the ability to comply with ADAgu idelines concerning photosensitive epilepsy and the NFPA standards when installing 2 or more visual appliances within the field of view all of this plus the ability to silence the audible is achieved by using only 2 wire. Features Approvals include: UL Standard 1971, UL Standard 464 New York City (M EA), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), Factory Mutual (FM), and Chicago (BFP). See approvals by model in Specifications and Ordering Information ADAINFPMJFCIANSI Compliant Wall mount models are available with Field Selectable Candela Settings of 15/30/75/11 0cd or 1351185cd (Multi- Candela models) or 1575cd (single candela model) Ceiling mount models are available with field selectable, candela settings of 15/30/75/95cd or 115/177cd (multi-candela ceiling models) Selectable Continuous Horn or Temporal (Code 3). 3 Selectable dBA settings (99, 95 and 90 dBA) in both tones Patented 2-Wire Audible Strobe Appliance. Patented Universal Mounting Plate Weatherproof models are available for outdoor use Strobes produce 1 flash per second over the regulated voltage range 12 and 24 VDC models with wide UL "Regulated Voltage Range" using filtered DC or unfiltered F\PJR input voltage The strobes can be synchronized using Wheelock's sync modules or power supplies with built in sync protocol Fast installation with IN/OUT screw terminals using #12 to #I8AWG wires For Weatherproof Series AS, See Datasheet S9004 C 071 APPIWVE 6948 151-92-E 7125-0785:131 391 AH42 I AS-121575W High (99) 12 vdc 0.163 0.260 ULmax* 0.192 0.320 dBA Med (95) 12 vdc 0.076 0.195 UL max* 0.108 0.275 dBA Low (90) 12 vdc 0.039 0.175 UL max* 0.058 0.265 dBA NOTE: All CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are Identified by the symbol A. All warnings are printed in bold capital letters. A WARNING: PLEASE READ THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING, SPECIFYING OR APPLYING THIS PRODUCT. VISIT WWW.COOPERWHEELOCK.COM OR CONTACT COOPER WHEELOCK FOR THE CURRENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH ANY OF THESE INSTRUCTIONS, CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN IMPROPER APPLICATION, INSTALLATION AND/OR OPERATION OF THESE PRODUCTS IN AN EMERGENCY SITUATION, WHICH COULD RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO YOU AND/OR OTHERS. General Notes: Strobes are designed to flash at I flash per second minimum over their"Regulated Voltage Range'. Note that NFPA-72 specifies a flash rate of I to 2 flashes per second and ADA Guidelines specify a flash rate of 1 t 3 flashes per second. All candela ratings represent minimum effective Strobe intensity based on UL Standard 1971. Series NS Strobe products are listed under UL Standard 1971 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) and maximum humidity of 93% (± 2%). - Series NH horns are listed under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances (Indoor use only). "Regulated Voltage Range" Is the newest terminology used by UL to Identify the voltage range. Prior to this change UL used the terminology "Listed Voltage Range". Table I: Ratings Per UL 1971 Model Number Input Voltage VDC Regulated Voltage Range VDC!FWR Strobe Candela (Cd) AS-24MCW 24 16.0-33.0 15/30/75/110 AS-24MCCH 24 16.0-33.0 115/177 AS-241575W 24 16.0-33.0 15 (75 on Axis) AS-121575W 12 8.0-17.5 15(75onAxis) AS-24MCC 24 16.0 -33.0 15/30/75/95 AS-24MCWH 24 16.0-33.0 135/185 ASWP-2475W 24 16.0-33.0 75 @ -31°F Table 2: dBA Ratings for 12 VDC and 24 VDC Series AS!AH 12 and 24 VDC Audible Reverberant Description Volume dBA dBA dBA Per UL 464 loft. High 91 99 Continuous Medium 88 95 Horn Low 83 90 High 87 99 Medium 84 95 Code 3 Horn Low 79 90 n Table 3: Average RMS Current Audible Wall Mount Audible Strobe Models Ceiling Mount Audible Strobe Models 24 VDC Models AH-24 AS-241575W AS-24MCW AS-24MCWH AS-24MCC AS-24MCCH 175cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 110cd 135cd 185cd 15cd 30cd 75cd 95cd 115cd 177cd High (99) 24 vdc 0.062 0.100 0.080 0.102 0.150 0.194 0.250 0.320 0.088 0.114 0.165 0.205 0.250 0.320 dBA UL max* 0.080 0.121 0.088 0.125 0.200 0.267 0.355 0.480 0.095 0.138 0.221 0.285 0.355 0.480 Med (95) 24 YcIC 0.033 0.080 0.060 0.084 0.132 0.173 0.230 0.305 0.066 0.092 0.145 0.186 0.230 0.305 dBA UL max* 0.043 0.107 0.074 0.110 0.190 0.253 0.340 0.465 0.080 0.122 0.201 0.269 0.340 0.465 Low (90) 24 vdc 0.017 0.072 0.052 0.076 0.121 0.158 0.220 0.295 0.056 0.082 0.132 0.173 0.220 0.295 dBA UL max* 0.021 0.100 0.068 0.105 0.182 0.245 0.335 0.460 0.074 0.113 0.198 0.263 0.335 0.460 12 VDC Models Audible Wail Mount Audible Strobe * RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33v for 24v units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16v for 24v units). For audibles the max current is usually at the maximum listed voltage (33v for 24v units). For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation instructions. - Table 4:Average Current* (AMPS) For Series ASWP' Voltage High dBA Setting (99)dBA Medium dBA Setting (95)dBA Low dBA Setting (90)dBA 24.0 VDC 0.128 0.105 0.098 UL Max* 0.168 0.155 0.150 n 0 SERIES AS APPLIANCES NON-SYNCHRONIZED SERIES AS & RSS APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED WTH PS-12124-8CP and PS4212481VIP SERIES AS APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED WITH DSM MODULE CLASS"A" NAC CIRCUIT WITH NO AUDIBLE SILENCE FEATURE Specifications and Ordering information OBE - STROBE AS L e SM S Circuit I I' +Atidjbl <EOLR - Audibi - Audi Audible NAC Circuit F Strobe NAC Ci j_ A Audible : NAC Strobe NAC c !M#2 Sync P A1eNAC ir DSM #3 Sync - StrobeNACCi. Interconnecting wiring shown. Maximum of twenty (20) For detail using SM or DSM Sync Module referto Data Sheet S3000 or Installation Instructions P83123 for SM and P83177 for DSM. For wiring informationon the power Supplies refer to Installation Instructions P84662 for PS-24-8MC. . 1 FROM TO NEXT PRECEDING ± + APPLIANCE APPLIANCE OR EOLR OR FACP Fv~ SERIES AS APPLIANCES-SYNCHRONIZED WITH SM MODULE SIN- GLE CLASS "B" NAC CIRCUIT WITH AUDIBLESILENCE FEATURE SERIES AS APPLIANCES SYNCHRONIZED WITH MULTIPLE DSM EOLR MODULES DSM #1 0 Model Order Code Strobe be Candela Non- Sync Sync w/SFVL DSM PS-24-81VC 24 VDC 12 VDC Wall Mount Mount Ceiling Agency Mounting 0t s Approvals UL MEA CSFIl FM BFP A$-24MCW-FR 9024 15130175/110 X X X - X - A,B,D,E,G,H,J,N,O,R,X X X X X X AS-24MCW-RN 9025 15/30/751110 X X X - X - A,B,D,E,G,H,J,N,O,R,X X X X X X AS-24MCWH-FR 3468 135/185 X X X - X - A,B,D,E,FG,H,J,N,O,RX X X X X * S-24MCWH-RN 3469 135/185 X X X - X - A,B,D,E,FG,H,J,N,O,RX X X X X * S-241 575W FR 7405 15 (75 on Axis) X X X - - A, B, D, E, F, G, H,J,N, 0, R,X X X X X X AS-121575W-FR 7410 15(75onAxis) X X - X X - A,B,D,E,F,aH,J,N,o,R,X X X X X X AS-24MCC-FR 3161 15130175/95 X X X - - X A,B,D,E,FG,H,J,N,0,R,X X X X X * AS-24MCC-FW 3162 15130/75/95 X X X - - X A,13,D,E,IG,H,J,N,0,R,X X X X X * AS-24MCCH-FW 3467 115/177 X X X - - X A,B,D,E,FG,H,J,N,0,R,X X X X X * ASWP2475WFR** 9012 75 @-31°F X X X - X - l(see Data Sheet S9004) X X X X X iH-24-R 7892 - .X X X - X X A,B,D,E,FG,H,J,N,0,R,X X X X . X X H-24-VV 7893 - X X X - X X A,13,D,E,FG,H,J,N,0,R,X X X X X X AH-12-R 7891 - X X - X X X A,B,D,E,FG,H,J,N,O,R,X X X X X X 4H-12-W 7894 - X X - X X X A,B,D,E,FG,H,J,N,0,R,X X X X X X AH24WPR** 7416 - X X X - X X K X X X - X H12WPR** 7415 - X X - X X X K X X X X "For Weatherproof Series AS/AH specifications see data sheet S9004. *PENDING '"Referto Data Sheet 87000 for Mounting Options. Note: Models are available in either Red or'Miite. Contact Customer Service for Order Code and Delivery. NOTE: Due to continuous development of our products, specifications and offerings are subject to change without notice in accordance with Wheelock Inc. standard terms and conditions. Architects and Engineers Specifications The notification appliances shall be Wheelock Series AS Audible Strobe appliances and Series AH Audible appliances or approved equals. The Series AS Audible be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing- Impaired) for Indoor Fire Protection Service. The SeriesAH Audible shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). Both shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 Class B. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The audible portion of the appliance shall have a minimum of three (3) field selectable settings for dBA levels and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs. The strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated Voltage Range and shall incorporate a Xenon flathtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan® lens. The Series AS shall be of low current design. Mere Multi- Candela appliances are specified, the strobe intensity shall have field selectable settings and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 at 15/30/75/110 or 1351185 candela for wall mount and 15130/75/95 or 115/177 candela for ceiling mount. The selector switch for selecting the candela shall be tamper resistant. The 1575 candela strobe shall be specified when 15 candela UL Standard 1971 Listing with 75 candela on-axis is required (e.g. ADA compliance). When synchronization is required, the appliance shall be compatible with Vheelock's SM, DSM Sync Modules or Wheelock PS- 24-8MC Power Supplies with built-in Patented Sync Protocol. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. If the sync module or Power Supply fails to operate, (i.e., contacts remain closed), the strobe shall revert to a non-synchronized flash- rate. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation when used with Wheelock synchronization. The Series AS Audible Strobe and SeriesAH Audible shall incorporate a Patented Universal Mounting Plate that shall allow mounting to a single-gang, double-gang, 4-inch square, 1 00m European type backboxes, or the SHBB Surface Backbox. If required, an NATP (Notification Appliance Trimplate) shall be provided. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible. 273 Branch port Avenue Long Branch, NJ 07740 Phone: (800) 631-2148 Fax: (732) 222-2588 www.cooperwheelock.com WE ENCOURAGE AND SUPPORT NICET CERTIFICATION 3 YEAR WARRANTY Made in USA n S8100 AS/AH06106 S S CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7125-0785:131 Page 1 of 2 CATEGORY: Fire Alarm Devices for the Hearing-Impaired LISTEE: Wheelock Inc., 273 Branchport Ave., Long Branch NJ 07740 Contact: Luy Nguyen (732) 433-6005 Fax (732) 222-5607 DESIGN: Models AS-1215, -2415, -1230, -2430, -121575, -241575, -2475 and -24110 audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by any three alpha/numeric characters indicating lens orientation, lettering and color. Models AS-1 215W, -2415W, -1230W, -2430W, -121575W, -241575W, -2475W and -24110W audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by any three alpha/numeric characters indicating lens orientation, lettering and color. These units with suffix -W are for wall mount only. Models AS-2415C, -2430C, -2475C and -241 OOC audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by two alpha/numeric characters indicating lens lettering, orientation and color. These units are intended for ceiling mount only. Model AH-12, -24, AH-12WP, -24WP audible appliances (no strobe), followed by an alpha or numeric character indicating product color. Model AS-24MCW and AS-24MCC audible/strobe, followed by any two alpha or numeric character indicating lettering and product color. Model ASWP-2475W audible/strobe with integral private mode fire/emergency visual signaling for non-hearing impaired applications. Model ASWP-2475W is also suitable for outdoor use when mounted to Model WPBB back box. Models AS-24MCWH and AS-24MCCH audible/strobes for the hearing impaired followed by two alpha/numeric characters indicating lens lettering and product color. Units with suffix C are for ceiling mount only. Units with suffix Ware for wall mount only. Refer to the listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. RATING: Electrical: 8-17.5/16-33 VDCNFR Candela: 15:15cd, 1575:15/75cd, 30:30cd, 75:75cd, 95:95cd, 100:100cd, 110:110cd MCW: Selectable 15cd, 30cd, 75cd, 110cd MCC: Selectable 1 5cd, 30cd, 75cd, 95cd MCWH: Selectable 135cd, 185cd MCCH: Selectable 115cd, 177cd INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Models ASWP-2475W and AS- 24MCW are for wall mount only. Models with suffix -W are for wall mount only. Models with suffix -C are for ceiling mount only. *Rev. 06-13-06 Listing No. 7125-0785:131 Page 2 of 2 MARKING: Listee's name, model number, electrical/candela rating, and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as audible and audible/visual signaling devices suitable for the hearing impaired when used in conjunction with separately listed electrically compatible fire alarm control units. For indoor use only except Models AH-12WP and AH-24WP audible appliances are suitable for indoor/outdoor. For synchronization, Models AS Series must be used with Model SM-12/24, SMX-12/24, DSM- 12/24 or DSMX-12/24 sync control module (CSFM Listing No. 7300-0785:132). Refer to listee's Installation Instruction Manual for details. These appliances can generate a distinctive three-pulse Temporal Pattern Fire Alarm Evacuation Signal (for total evacuation) in accordance with NFPA 72, 2002 Edition. NOTE: Models ASWP-2475W, AH-12, AH-24, -12WP and -24WP audible devices are not suitable for the hearing impaired applications. *Rev. 06-13-06 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: JUNE 4 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marshal Program Manager 0 S o l 0 SECTION2 FIRE ALARM CABLE PART NUMBER AWG CONDUCTOR SHIELDED/ OVERALL I - I UNSHIELDED I DIAMETER CONO CTOR ET COLOR EcOR RA1INGI VOLTAGE I WEIGHT MARKINGS TEMP PUT BLACK I RED, WHITE I 300v 9.0 ADT 4944752 PAIR I 60°C 500 LIGHT BLUE / LBS 22 AWG REEL YELLOW TYPE CMR/ FPLR (UL) BLACK, RED RED 8.0 FPLR/CMR 18 AWG 75°C 500 LBS (UL) C (UL) Box CMG 20.0 (UL) TYPE FPLR 60°C 500 LBS 14 AWG REEL 2.14 DON'T SEE IT? CALL 1-888-423-8947 ORDERS: PHONE 1-888-423-8947, FAX 847-797-3853 2.15 SECTJON2 FIRE ALARM CABLE F PART NUMBER AWG lcD 11 SHIELDED! I OVERALL I UNSHIELDED DIAMETER CONDUCTOR JACKET COLOR COLOR I VOLTAGE RATING I WEIGHT Qbs)AInft MARKINGS TEMP I plff UPS ff] I 14 AWG I WHITE I 300v I 50.0 ADI 494479 2/C 60°C 500 BLACK! RED, LBS 14 AWG 2/C 18 AWG REEL 18 AWG TYPE FPLR/ CL3R LIGHT BLUE I (UL) YELLOW BLACK, RED RED 20.0 2C 14AWG (UL) LBS FPLR WHITE 20.0 ADT 494478 75°C LBS 2CI4AWG TYPE FPLR/ CL3R (UL) (USA) BLACK, RED, RED 35.0 FPLR/CL3R BROWN, BLUE LBS 14 AWG (UL) BLACK, RED WHITE 33.0 AOl 494480 LBS 2C12AWG TYPE FPLR/ ,- CUR (UL) (GSA) 2.12 DONT SEE IT? CALL 1-888-423-8947 ORDERS: PHONE 1-888-423-8947, FAX 7793 2.13 CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL FIRE ENGINEERING - BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM- LISTING SERVICE LISTING No. 7161-1295:100 Page 1 of 1 CATEGORY: Cables-Fire Protective Signaling LISTEE: Comtran, 1 Main St., Whitinsville MA 01586-2210 Contact: *Richard Wagner (508) 234-6256 FAX (508) 234-7132 DESIGN: Types FPL, FPLR and FPLP. Refer to listee's data sheet for detailed product description and operational considerations. INSTALLATION: In accordance with listee's printed installation instructions, applicable codes, NEC Article 760 and ordinances and in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. MARKING: Listee's name, NEC rating and UL label. APPROVAL: Listed as power-limited fire protective signaling cable. *Rev. 06-16-2003 This listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed the test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not an endorsement or + recommendation of the item listed. This listing should not be used to verify correct operational requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee's data sheet, installation instructions and/or other suitable information sources. Date Issued: MAY 31, 2007 Listing Expires June 30, 2008 Authorized By: MIKE TANAKA, Senior Deputy State Fire Marshal Program Manager